Reference Manual - clv490.pdf - Machine Vision Components

O PERATING I NSTRUCTIONS 

CLV 490 

Bar Code Scanner 

Advanced line

Software versions 

Operating Instructions 

CLV 490 Bar Code Scanner 

Software versions 

Software/Tool Function Version 

CLV 490-0010/-0011 Firmware From V 0.90 0000 

CLV 490-1010/-1011 Firmware From V 0.90 0000 

CLV 490-6010/-6011 Firmware From V 1.22 K609 

CLV 490-7010/-7011 Firmware From V 1.22 K609 

CLV 490-2010/-2011 Firmware From V 1.30 KA54 

CLV 490-3010/-3011 Firmware From V 1.30 KA54 

CLV-Setup User interface From V 2.70 J645 

CLV-Setup Help Online help (HTML) From V 1.1 

I-ViewPro TM HTML browser (offline) From V 2.38 

Windows 95 TM /98 TM , Windows NT TM , Windows XP TM and Internet Explorer TM are registered 

trademarks or trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries. 

Netscape Navigator TM is a registered trademark of the Netscape Communications Cooperation, 

USA. I-ViewPro TM is a registered trademark of EnReach Technology, Inc., USA. 

I-2 © SICK AG · Division Auto Ident · Germany · All rights reserved 8 008 796/0000/25-06-2002


Quick Finder 



Quick Finder 

• What is delivered with the device 

– Chapter 3.1.1 Scope of delivery, Page 3-1 

• CAUTION! 

– Chapter 2 Safety information, Page 2-1 

• Mounting the device at the reading station 

– Chapter 4 Installation, Page 4-1 

• Connecting the device 

– Chapter 5 Electrical installation, Page 5-1 

• Overview of the device and its functions 

– Chapter 3 Product description, Page 3-1 

– Chapter 6.2 Default settings, Page 6-1 

– Chapter 6.5 Operating modes and outputing the reading result, Page 6-19 

– Chapter 9 Technical data, Page 9-1 

– Chapter 10.3 Installing and operating the external parameter memory, Page 10-34 

• Starting the device with the default settings 

– Chapter 6.3 Quick start, Page 6-3 

• Installing the "CLV-Setup" program 

– Chapter 10.6 Installing and operating the "CLV-Setup" program, Page 10-41 

• Adapting the device to the reading application 

– Chapter 6.4 Configuring (parameterization) the CLV, Page 6-5 

• Troubleshooting 

– Chapter 8 Troubleshooting, Page 8-1 

• Finding information 

– Table of contents, Page I-5 

– Index, Page 10-85 

8 008 796/0000/25-06-2002 © SICK AG · Division Auto Ident · Germany · All rights reserved I-3

Quick Finder 



Installation procedure (overview) 

Reading trigger via “Sensor“ switching input (default setting) 

1. Check the delivery to make sure that none of the components is missing. 

2. Mount the CLV at the reading station and align it with the object carrying the bar code. 

3. Mount the AMV/S 60 Connection Module. 

4. Connect the CLV to the AMV/S 60 Connection Module using the two cables 

no. 2 020 302. 

Alternatively, connect the device to the AMV/S 60 via the external parameter memory 

no. 2 020 307. 

5. Connect the reading pulse sensor to the "Sensor" switching input in the AMV/S 60. 

6. Connect the host to the host interface in the AMV/S 60. 

Adapt the AMV/S 60 to the host interface type of the CLV. 

7. Switch on the power supply to the AMV/S 60. 

The "Device Ready" LED lights up after the CLV has started. 

CLV with external parameter memory connected: 

The "Device Ready" LED and the "Read Result" LEDs blink after the CLV has started. 

The CLV is not ready to start reading. See step 11. 

Line scanner with oscillating mirror: 

In the default setting, the CLV deflects the scan line around the position CW = 50 with 

a frequency of 1 Hz and an oscillating amplitude of max. ±20° (±40 CW). 

8. Switch on your PC and start Windows TM (minimum requirement: Windows 95 TM ). 

9. Install the "CLV-Setup" software, online CLV-Setup Help and, if necessary, the 

I-ViewPro TM HTML browser from the CD on your PC. 

10. Connect the PC to the terminal interface of the CLV. To do so, connect the RS 232 data 

connection cable (e. g. no. 2 014 054) to the "Service plug" in the AMV/S 60. 

11. Start the "CLV-Setup" program. 

CLV-Setup establishes communication with the CLV and uploads the parameter set. 

The parameters are then displayed on the tabs. 


First download the CLV parameter set to the external memory. 

Disconnect the AMV/S 60 briefly from the power supply to restart the CLV. 

12. Carry out a test read using test bar codes (clock the CLV accordingly). 

Display the reading result in the Terminal Emulator window of the "CLV-Setup" program. 

13. Configure the CLV for the application using the settings on the tabs in CLV-Setup. 

Copy (download) the modified parameter set to the CLV temporarily. 

Do not switch off the power to the AMV/S 60 (CLV)! 

14. Test the application under realistic conditions. 

15. Check whether the data is transmitted correctly between the CLV and host. 

16. If necessary, correct and optimize the parameter values. 

Copy (download) the parameter set permanently to the CLV. 


Copy the modified parameter set to the external parameter memory. 

17. Save the parameter set as a configuration file "*.scl" in the "CLV-Setup" program. 

The CLV can then be operated with the application-specific settings. 



Contents 


Table of contents 

1 Notes on this document............................................................................................ 1-1 

1.1 Purpose ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1 

1.2 Target audience........................................................................................................................ 1-1 

1.2.1 Mounting, electrical installation, maintenance and replacement.................... 1-1 

1.2.2 Startup, operation and configuration......................................................................... 1-1 

1.3 Information content................................................................................................................. 1-2 

1.4 Symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-2 

2 Safety information....................................................................................................... 2-1 

2.1 Authorized users ...................................................................................................................... 2-1 

2.1.1 Mounting and maintenance .......................................................................................... 2-1 

2.1.2 Electrical installation and replacement ..................................................................... 2-1 

2.1.3 Startup, operation and configuration......................................................................... 2-1 

2.2 Intended use.............................................................................................................................. 2-1 

2.3 General safety instructions and protection measures .............................................. 2-1 

2.4 Quick stop and quick restart................................................................................................ 2-3 

2.4.1 Stopping the CLV............................................................................................................... 2-3 

2.4.2 Restarting the CLV ............................................................................................................ 2-3 

2.5 Environmental information....................................................................................................2-4 

2.5.1 Power requirements.........................................................................................................2-4 

2.5.2 Disposal after removal from service.......................................................................... 2-4 

3 Product description .................................................................................................... 3-1 

3.1 Design .......................................................................................................................................... 3-1 

3.1.1 Scope of delivery............................................................................................................... 3-1 

3.1.2 Variants ................................................................................................................................. 3-1 

3.1.3 System requirements ...................................................................................................... 3-2 

3.1.4 Design ................................................................................................................................... 3-4 

3.2 Method of operation............................................................................................................... 3-5 

3.2.1 Autofocus function............................................................................................................ 3-6 

3.2.2 Event-controlled dynamic focus control ................................................................... 3-7 

3.2.3 Scan procedure variants ................................................................................................ 3-7 

3.2.4 Additional components ................................................................................................... 3-8 

3.3 Indicators and control elements ........................................................................................ 3-8 

3.3.1 Control elements............................................................................................................... 3-8 

3.3.2 Function of the LEDs........................................................................................................ 3-8 

4 Installation..................................................................................................................... 4-1 

4.1 Installation sequence ............................................................................................................. 4-1 

4.2 Preparations............................................................................................................................... 4-1 

4.2.1 Required components..................................................................................................... 4-1 

4.2.2 Required accessories...................................................................................................... 4-1 

4.2.3 Required auxiliary parts .................................................................................................. 4-1 

4.2.4 Replacing the laser warning label ............................................................................... 4-2 

4.2.5 Selecting the mounting location .................................................................................. 4-2 

4.2.6 Mounting accessories ..................................................................................................... 4-3 

4.2.7 Distance between the CLV and the bar code........................................................ 4-4 

4.2.8 Count direction of the code position CP and code angle CW.......................... 4-6 

4.3 Mounting and adjusting the device................................................................................... 4-7 

4.3.1 Mounting the CLV.............................................................................................................. 4-7 

4.3.2 Adjusting the CLV .............................................................................................................. 4-8 

4.3.3 Adjusting mode .................................................................................................................. 4-9 

4.4 Mounting the external components................................................................................4-10 

4.4.1 Mounting the AMV/S 60 Connection Module......................................................4-10 

4.4.2 Mounting the external reading pulse sensor........................................................4-10 

4.4.3 Mounting the sensors for detecting the object distance.................................4-12 

4.5 Dismantling the device ........................................................................................................4-13 

5 Electrical installation ................................................................................................. 5-1 


Contents 



5.1 Installation sequence.............................................................................................................5-1 

5.1.1 SICK Connection Modules (overview)......................................................................5-1 

5.2 Electrical connections and cables .....................................................................................5-2 

5.2.1 Wire cross-sections ..........................................................................................................5-2 

5.2.2 Prefabricated cables (overview) ..................................................................................5-2 

5.2.3 Connections/cables for the AMV/S Connection Module ...................................5-3 

5.2.4 Connections/cables for the Bus Connection Modules 

BMV 10 and BMS 20 ......................................................................................................5-4 

5.2.5 Connections/cables for the external parameter memory 

(connection to AMV/S or BMV 10/BMS 20)..........................................................5-4 

5.2.6 Connections/cables for the IP 65 connector cover 

(connection to AMV 100/200 or BMV 10).............................................................5-5 

5.3 Connector pin assignment....................................................................................................5-6 

5.3.1 Terminals on the CLV.......................................................................................................5-6 

5.3.2 External parameter memory no. 2 020 307/2 021 689 

(optional accessory) 

connector cover no. 2 021 298 (optional accessory) .......................................5-7 

5.4 Preparations for electrical installation...............................................................................5-8 

5.4.1 Requirements for the host interface..........................................................................5-8 

5.4.2 Supply voltage ....................................................................................................................5-8 

5.4.3 Non-SICK Power supply unit/connections without the Connection Module5-9 

5.5 Electrical installation procedure.......................................................................................5-13 

5.5.1 Individual steps................................................................................................................ 5-13 

5.5.2 Tools.................................................................................................................................... 5-13 

5.5.3 Connecting the supply voltage ..................................................................................5-13 

5.5.4 Connecting the host interface ...................................................................................5-14 

5.5.5 Connecting the CAN interface ...................................................................................5-15 

5.5.6 Connecting the PC..........................................................................................................5-15 

5.5.7 Connecting the switching inputs ...............................................................................5-16 

5.5.8 Connecting the "Result 1 Result 4" switching outputs ....................................5-19 

6 Operation ....................................................................................................................... 6-1 

6.1 Overview of steps for starting up the CLV ......................................................................6-1 

6.2 Default settings .........................................................................................................................6-1 

6.2.1 Default settings of the line scanner CLV 490 (all variants)...............................6-2 

6.2.2 Default settings of the line scanner with oscillating mirror 

CLV 490 (all variants) ......................................................................................................6-2 

6.3 Quick start ...................................................................................................................................6-3 

6.3.1 Switching the CLV on for the first time with the factory default settings......6-3 

6.3.2 Switching the CLV with external parameter memory connected on 

for the first time with the factory default settings .................................................6-4 

6.4 Configuring (parameterization) the CLV...........................................................................6-5 

6.4.1 Configuring the CLV via the user interface of CLV-Setup...................................6-5 

6.4.2 Function of the tabs in CLV-Setup (overview) ........................................................6-6 

6.4.3 Parameterizing example .................................................................................................6-8 

6.4.4 Guide to parameterization menu.................................................................................6-8 

6.5 Operating modes and outputing the reading result .................................................6-19 

6.5.1 Reading mode (standard operating mode)..........................................................6-19 

6.5.2 Percentage evaluation..................................................................................................6-22 

6.5.3 Adjusting mode................................................................................................................ 6-24 

6.5.4 Background teach-in .....................................................................................................6-25 

6.5.5 Show CP-limits .................................................................................................................6-26 

6.5.6 Displaying and editing operating data ....................................................................6-28 

6.5.7 Reading diagnosis ..........................................................................................................6-28 

6.5.8 Monitor Host Interface..................................................................................................6-29 

6.5.9 Auxiliary input....................................................................................................................6-31 

6.5.10 Self-test ..............................................................................................................................6-31 

6.5.11 Executing CLV functions interactively......................................................................6-32 



Contents 


6.6 CLV messages ........................................................................................................................6-33 

6.6.1 Displaying messages.....................................................................................................6-33 

6.6.2 System messages ..........................................................................................................6-33 

6.6.3 Warning messages.........................................................................................................6-33 

6.6.4 Error messages ...............................................................................................................6-33 

6.7 Switching off the CLV............................................................................................................6-34 

7 Maintenance................................................................................................................. 7-1 

7.1 Cleaning the CLV during operation.................................................................................... 7-1 

7.2 Maintenance.............................................................................................................................. 7-2 

7.3 Disposal....................................................................................................................................... 7-2 

8 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................... 8-1 

8.1 Overview of the possible errors and malfunctions...................................................... 8-1 

8.1.1 Mounting errors ................................................................................................................. 8-1 

8.1.2 Electrical installation errors............................................................................................ 8-1 

8.1.3 Parameter errors............................................................................................................... 8-1 

8.1.4 Malfunctions........................................................................................................................ 8-1 

8.2 Monitoring error and malfunctions .................................................................................... 8-1 

8.3 Error messages ........................................................................................................................ 8-2 

8.3.1 CLV without external parameter memory................................................................ 8-2 

8.3.2 LED error messages for the external parameter memory................................ 8-5 

8.3.3 Messages for errors accessing the external parameter memory................. 8-7 

8.4 ST error status in the reading result of a bar code..................................................... 8-9 

8.5 Troubleshooting......................................................................................................................8-10 

8.5.1 General malfunctions: CLV not ready......................................................................8-10 

8.5.2 Malfunctions in Reading mode: reading trigger errors......................................8-11 

8.5.3 Malfunctions in Reading mode: result output errors.........................................8-12 

8.5.4 Malfunctions in Reading mode: errors in the result status output...............8-14 

8.5.5 Malfunctions in Reading mode: oscillating mirror errors..................................8-15 

8.6 SICK Support ...........................................................................................................................8-15 

9 Technical data.............................................................................................................. 9-1 

9.1 Data sheet CLV 490-0010/-2010/-6010 bar code scanner............................... 9-1 


9.3 Data sheet CLV 490-0011 /-2011/-6011 bar code scanner.............................. 9-2 


9.5 Dimensioned drawings – CLV............................................................................................. 9-3 

9.5.1 Line scanner (standard device) without /with heater ......................................... 9-3 

9.5.2 Line scanner with oscillating mirror (without/with heater)................................. 9-4 

10Appendix ..................................................................................................................... 10-1 

10.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................10-1 

10.2 Specification diagrams.........................................................................................................10-1 

10.2.1 Reading conditions for all diagrams.........................................................................10-1 

10.2.2 Overview of diagrams....................................................................................................10-2 

10.2.3 Standard density: Reading performance data of line scanner......................10-3 

10.2.4 Standard density: Reading performance data of line scanner 

with oscillating mirror .....................................................................................................10-9 

10.2.5 High density: Reading performance data of line scanner ............................10-16 

10.2.6 High density: Reading performance data line scanner with 

oscillating mirror............................................................................................................10-21 

10.2.7 Low density: Reading performance data of line scanner .............................10-27 

10.2.8 Low density: Reading performance data of line scanner with 

oscillating mirror............................................................................................................10-31 

10.3 Installing and operating the external parameter memory...................................10-34 

10.3.1 Function ...........................................................................................................................10-34 

10.3.2 Installation and electrical connection ...................................................................10-35 

10.3.3 Operation.........................................................................................................................10-35 

10.3.4 Switching on the device for the first time ...........................................................10-36 

10.3.5 Adjusting the parameter set in the external parameter memory 


Contents 



after it has been downloaded to the CLV .......................................................... 10-36 

10.3.6 Meaning of the LEDs.................................................................................................. 10-37 

10.3.7 Error messages............................................................................................................10-37 

10.3.8 Replacing a CLV ...........................................................................................................10-37 

10.4 Optional heating.................................................................................................................. 10-38 

10.4.1 Features.......................................................................................................................... 10-38 

10.4.2 Design.............................................................................................................................. 10-38 

10.4.3 Function........................................................................................................................... 10-38 

10.4.4 Electrical installation ...................................................................................................10-39 

10.4.5 Outdoor applications .................................................................................................. 10-39 

10.5 System messages .............................................................................................................10-40 

10.5.1 CLV without external parameter memory.......................................................... 10-40 

10.5.2 CLV with external parameter memory connected.......................................... 10-40 

10.6 Installing and operating the "CLV-Setup" program................................................ 10-41 

10.6.1 Preparations .................................................................................................................. 10-41 

10.6.2 Installing the software................................................................................................ 10-41 

10.6.3 Starting CLV-Setup...................................................................................................... 10-43 

10.6.4 User interface................................................................................................................ 10-45 

10.6.5 Functions ........................................................................................................................ 10-46 

10.6.6 CLV-Setup Help ............................................................................................................10-46 

10.6.7 Transferring parameter sets between CLV-Setup and the CLV ................ 10-47 

10.6.8 Unknown parameters................................................................................................. 10-47 

10.6.9 Log file in the Terminal Emulator ........................................................................... 10-48 

10.6.10 Starting CLV-Setup with an "INI file" as an argument.................................... 10-48 

10.6.11 The CLV Assistant........................................................................................................10-48 

10.7 Configuring a CLV with command strings.................................................................. 10-49 

10.8 Calculating parameter values for setting the CLV.................................................. 10-51 

10.8.1 Calculating the number of scans (for standard decoders).......................... 10-51 

10.8.2 Calculating the start position and mirror speed for the forward 

and return phase of the One-Shot function ...................................................... 10-53 

10.8.3 Calculating the necessary bar code distance if several bar 

codes are read on each object.............................................................................. 10-54 

10.9 Tables ..................................................................................................................................... 10-55 

10.9.1 Calculating the code length of a bar code......................................................... 10-55 

10.10 Discussion of a parameterization example.............................................................. 10-56 

10.10.1 Application Conditions ............................................................................................... 10-56 

10.10.2 Purpose of this discussion....................................................................................... 10-56 

10.10.3 Instructions for solution – step by step .............................................................. 10-56 

10.10.4 Important clarifications .............................................................................................. 10-57 

10.10.5 Mounting and electrical connection ..................................................................... 10-57 

10.10.6 Parameterize the CLV with the "CLV-Setup" program .................................. 10-58 

10.10.7 Testing the application .............................................................................................. 10-64 

10.11 Special applications and procedures ......................................................................... 10-65 

10.11.1 Auxiliary input................................................................................................................. 10-65 

10.11.2 Daisy-chain configuration 

(data forwarding or master/slave arrangement)............................................. 10-68 

10.11.3 SICK network (RS 485)............................................................................................. 10-68 

10.11.4 Connection to Profibus DP....................................................................................... 10-68 

10.11.5 Connection to the DeviceNet.................................................................................. 10-68 

10.11.6 Connection to Interbus-S.......................................................................................... 10-68 

10.11.7 Connection to Ethernet ............................................................................................. 10-68 

10.11.8 Building a CAN scanner network ........................................................................... 10-68 

10.11.9 Integration in an OPS reading system ................................................................. 10-68 

10.12 Replacing a CLV (copying the parameter set)......................................................... 10-69 

10.12.1 Downloading the parameter set............................................................................ 10-69 

10.12.2 Importing the parameter set from the external memory............................. 10-70 

10.13 Accessories .......................................................................................................................... 10-71 



Contents 


10.13.1 Mounting accessories ................................................................................................10-71 

10.13.2 Connection modules...................................................................................................10-71 

10.13.3 Bus connection modules ..........................................................................................10-71 

10.13.4 Cables, external parameter memories and plug cover.................................10-73 

10.13.5 Plug-in connections .....................................................................................................10-74 

10.13.6 Reading pulse generators.........................................................................................10-74 

10.13.7 Network controller .......................................................................................................10-74 

10.14 Dimensioned drawings of the accessories...............................................................10-75 

10.14.1 Angle bracket, single no. 2 013 824 ...................................................................10-75 

10.14.2 Articulated bracket No. 2 018 435 ......................................................................10-75 

10.14.3 Quick clamping device No. 2 016 110 ...............................................................10-75 

10.15 Supplementary documentation.....................................................................................10-76 

10.16 Glossary..................................................................................................................................10-77 

10.17 Copy of the EC Declaration of Conformity.................................................................10-85 

10.18 Index ........................................................................................................................................10-87 

10.19 Bar code example ..............................................................................................................10-91 


Figures and tables 



AMV/S 

BMV/S 

CAN 

CLV 

DC 

DOF 

EEPROM 

HD 

HTML 

LED 

PLC 

RAM 

ROM 

RTF 

SMART 

Abbreviations 

Connection Module with signal distribution/with additional power supply pack 

Bus Connection module with signal distribution/with additional power supply 

Controller Area Network (standard field bus system with message-orientated data exchange 

protocol) 

Code-Leser V-Prinzip. 

The CLV 490 bar code scanners are abbreviated to "CLV" in this documentation, exept where 

a distinction is necessary 

Distance Configuration 

Depth Of Field 

Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory 

High Density 

Hyper Text Markup Language (page-description language on the internet) 

Light Emitting Diode 

Programmable Logic Controller 

Ramdom Acces Memory 

Read Only Memory 

Rich Text Format (standard document format with format descriptions) 

SICK Modular Advanced Recognition Technology 

Tables 

Table 3-1: CLV variants ........................................................................................................................ 3-1 

Table 3-2: Meaning of LEDs: CLV without external parameter memory........................... 3-9 

Table 3-3: Meaning of LEDs: CLV with external parameter memory................................3-10 

Table 4-1: Permissible reading angles between the scan line and bar code ................. 4-5 

Table 5-1: Connection Modules for the CLV ................................................................................ 5-1 

Table 5-2: Cables for connecting the CLV..................................................................................... 5-2 

Table 5-3: Pin assignment of the 15-pin D Sub HD "Host/Term" plug ............................. 5-6 

Table 5-4: Pin assignment of the 15-pin D Sub HD "I/O" socket........................................ 5-6 

Table 5-5: Pin assignment of the 15-pin D Sub HD "Host/Term" cable plug ................. 5-7 

Table 5-6: Pin assignment of the 15-pin D Sub HD "I/O" cable socket............................ 5-7 

Table 5-7: Maximum cable lengths between the CLV and host........................................... 5-8 

Table 5-8: Power consumption of the CLV ................................................................................... 5-8 

Table 5-9: Power-up delay as a function of the device number GN................................... 5-8 

Table 5-10: Wire color assignment of the cable no. 2 020 303 .......................................... 5-9 

Table 5-11: Wire color assignment of the cable no. 2 020 264..........................................5-10 

Table 5-12: Wire color assignment of cable 1 for external parameter memory 

no. 2 020 981 .................................................................................................................5-11 

Table 5-13: Wire color assignment of cable 2 for external parameter memory 

no. 2 020 981 .................................................................................................................5-11 

Table 5-14: Wire color assignment cable 1 for connector cover no. 2 021 267..........5-12 

Table 5-15: Wire color assignment cable 2 for connector cover no. 2 021 267..........5-12 

Table 5-16: Communication parameters for the host interface (default setting)...........5-14 

Table 5-17: Characteristic data of the "Sensor" switching input ..........................................5-16 

Table 5-18: Pin and terminal assignment for "IN 0 ... IN 4" switching inputs...................5-17 

Table 5-19: Characteristic data of the "IN 0 ... N 4" switching inputs.................................5-18 

Table 5-20: Dynamic focus control: switching inputs/distance configuration 

assignment table.............................................................................................................5-18 

Table 5-21: Combination of the functions of the "IN 0 ... IN 4" switching inputs ...........5-19 

Table 5-22: Pin and terminal assignment for "Result 1 ... Result 4" 





switching outputs............................................................................................................5-20 

Table 5-23: Characteristic data of the "Result 1 ... Result 4" switching outputs............5-20 

Table 6-1: Extract: Default parameter settings of the line scanner 

CLV 490-0010/-0011 ....................................................................................................6-2 

Table 6-2: Extract: Default parameter settings of the line scanner with 

oscillating mirror CLV 490..............................................................................................6-2 

Table 6-3: Reading distances for default settings......................................................................6-4 

Table 6-4: Guide: Parameterizing autofocus mode (Part 1)...................................................6-9 

Table 6-5: Guide: Parameterizing the autofocus function (Part 2)....................................6-10 

Table 6-6: Guide: Parameterizing the event-controlled focus control..............................6-11 

Table 6-7: Guide: Parameterizing oscillating mirror functions.............................................6-12 

Table 6-8: Guide: Parameterizing the reading trigger source .............................................6-16 

Table 6-9: Guide: Parameterizing the laser timeout ...............................................................6-16 

Table 6-10: Guide: Settings for evaluating identical bar codes ............................................6-17 

Table 6-11: "Monitor Host Interface" function.............................................................................6-29 

Table 6-12: Warning messages ........................................................................................................6-33 

Table 8-1: Error messages output on the terminal interface.................................................8-2 

Table 8-2: LED error messages for access to the external parameter memory...........8-5 

Table 8-3: Messages for problems accessing the external parameter memory...........8-7 

Table 8-4: Meaning of the ST error status in the reading result...........................................8-9 

Table 8-5: Troubleshooting: restoring operation (Reading mode) ....................................8-10 

Table 8-6: Troubleshooting: reading trigger errors in Reading mode ..............................8-11 

Table 8-7: Troubleshooting: result output errors in Reading mode..................................8-12 

Table 8-8: Troubleshooting: errors in the result status output in Reading mode........8-14 

Table 8-9: Troubleshooting: oscillating mirror errors in Reading mode...........................8-15 

Table 9-1: Technical specifications of the CLV 490-0010/-2010/-6010 .......................9-1 




Table 10-1: Reading conditions for specification diagrams....................................................10-1 

Table 10-2: Overview of specification diagrams for the line scanner.................................10-2 

Table 10-3: Overview of specification diagrams for the line scanner with 

oscillating mirror ..............................................................................................................10-2 

Table 10-4: External parameter memory................................................................................... 10-34 

Table 10-5: CLV system messages.............................................................................................. 10-40 

Table 10-6: Additional CLV system messages for the connected 

parameter memory..................................................................................................... 10-40 

Table 10-7: Default settings in CLV-Setup ................................................................................. 10-43 

Table 10-8: Formulas for calculating the code length of a bar code............................... 10-55 

Table 10-9: Communication parameters on the terminal/PC for the auxiliary input.. 10-67 

Table 10-10: Communication parameter settings for the ST 1100 decoder................. 10-67 

Table 10-11: Accessories: mounting accessories..................................................................... 10-71 

Table 10-12: Accessories: connection modules........................................................................ 10-71 

Table 10-13: Accessories: bus connection modules ............................................................... 10-71 

Table 10-14: Accessories: cables and connector covers for the CLV without heater 10-73 

Table 10-15: Accessories: cables and connector covers for the CLV with heater....... 10-74 

Table 10-16: Accessories: plug-in connections.......................................................................... 10-74 

Table 10-17: Accessories: network controller............................................................................. 10-74 

Table 10-18: Supplementary documentation in English language...................................... 10-76 




Figures 


Fig. 2-1: Laser warning labels on the CLV (applicable for Europe)..................................... 2-2 

Fig. 3-1: Design of the CLV 490....................................................................................................... 3-4 

Fig. 3-2: Block diagram: CLV functions .......................................................................................... 3-5 

Fig. 3-3: Optimization of the depth of field for the object....................................................... 3-6 

Fig. 3-4: 

Dynamic focus control: classification of the reading range in 

distance configurations ...................................................................................................... 3-7 

Fig. 3-5: LEDs .......................................................................................................................................... 3-8 

Fig. 4-1: Line scanner: replacing the laser warning labels ..................................................... 4-2 

Fig. 4-2: Line scanner: position of the securing threads on the CLV ................................. 4-3 

Fig. 4-3: Line scanner: Mounting possibilities of the CLV....................................................... 4-3 

Fig. 4-4: Scanning methods: alignment with bar code and conveyor direction ............. 4-4 

Fig. 4-5: Definition of the reading distance a and of the aperture angle a...................... 4-4 

Fig. 4-6: Line scanner: Reading angle between the scan line and the bar code .......... 4-5 

Fig. 4-7: Avoiding surface reflections: Angle between the emitted light and 

the bar code (tilted away from the vertical axis) ...................................................... 4-5 

Fig. 4-8: Count direction of the code position CP in the scan line and of the 

code angle CW for the oscillating mirror...................................................................... 4-6 

Fig. 4-9: Line scanner: scan line in Adjusting mode ................................................................. 4-9 

Fig. 4-10: Line scanner: mounting example for the external reading pulse sensor......4-10 

Fig. 4-11: Mounting example for object distance detection ..................................................4-12 

Fig. 5-1: Block diagram: Connection of the CLV to the AMV/S 60 

connection module .............................................................................................................. 5-3 

Fig. 5-2: Connecting the host interface .......................................................................................5-14 

Fig. 5-3: Connecting the terminal interface................................................................................5-15 

Fig. 5-4: Connections of the "Sensor" switching input ..........................................................5-16 

Fig. 5-5: Connections of the "IN 0 ... IN 4" switching inputs................................................5-17 

Fig. 5-6: Connections of the "Result 1 ... Result 4" switching outputs ............................5-20 

Fig. 6-1: Bar code pattern (Code 39; module width 0.35 mm; Print ratio 2:1)............. 6-3 

Fig. 6-2: Narrowing the visible range using limit values.........................................................6-10 

Fig. 6-3: Oscillating mirror: "Oscillating with fixed amplitude" mode.................................6-13 

Fig. 6-4: Oscillating mirror: "Oscillating with variable amplitude" mode ..........................6-14 

Fig. 6-5: One-Shot: Object tracking (bar code read from front) .........................................6-15 

Fig. 6-6: CLV-Setup: Displaying the reading result in the Terminal Emulator................6-20 

Fig. 6-7: Reading result of the terminal interface: structure for Good Read .................6-21 

Fig. 6-8: Reading result of the terminal interface: structure for No Read ......................6-21 

Fig. 6-9: CLV-Setup: Displaying the percentage evaluation in the 

Terminal Emulator ..............................................................................................................6-23 

Fig. 6-10: CLV-Setup: Dialog window for running the background teach-in.....................6-25 

Fig. 6-11: CLV-Setup: Display of th learned background ........................................................6-26 

Fig. 6-12: Appearance of scan line in the "Show CP-limits" mode......................................6-27 

Fig. 6-13: CLV-Setup: "Operating Data" dialog box...................................................................6-28 

Fig. 6-14: CLV-Setup: Displaying the reading result of the host interface in 

the Terminal Emulator with direction identifier at the beginning 

(in this case: O = Output)................................................................................................6-30 

Fig. 6-15: CLV-Setup: Displaying the self-test result in the Terminal Emulator...............6-31 

Fig. 6-16: CLV-Setup: Dialog box for executing Show limits...................................................6-32 

Fig. 7-1: Cleaning the reading window ........................................................................................... 7-1 

Fig. 7-2: Cleaning the external optical sensors (reading pulse generator, 

object-height detector)....................................................................................................... 7-2 

Fig. 9-1: Dimensions of the CLV 490 line scanner, front reading window....................... 9-3 

Fig. 9-2: 

Fig. 10-1: 

Fig. 10-2: 

Dimensions of the CLV 490: line scanner with oscillating mirror, 

side reading window............................................................................................................ 9-4 

CLV 490-0010/-0011 (Standard density): Reading field height as 

a function of the reading distance and resolution................................................10-3 

CLV 490-0010/-0011 (Standard density): Min. and Max. reading 

distance (measured radially) as a function of the focus position at a 

resolution of 0.35 mm and an aperture angle of α =40° ................................10-4 





Fig. 10-3: CLV 490-0010/-0011 (Standard density): Min. and Max. reading 


resolution of 0.35 mm and an aperture angle of α =56°................................10-5 







Fig. 10-6: Characteristics field CLV 490-0010/-0011: Scanning frequency as a 

function of the reading distance and resolution ....................................................10-8 

Fig. 10-7: CLV 490-1010/-1011 (Standard density): Reading field height as a 

function of the reading distance and resolution ....................................................10-9 



resolution of 0.35 mm and an aperture angle of α =40°............................. 10-10 

Fig. 10-9: 

CLV 490-1010/-1011 (Standard density): Min. and Max. reading 









Fig. 10-12: Characteristics field CLV 490-1010/-1011: Scanning frequency as 

a function of the reading distance and resolution.............................................. 10-14 

Fig. 10-13: CLV 490-1010/-1011 (Standard density): deflection range as a 

function of reading distance, deflection angle and resolution....................... 10-15 

Fig. 10-14: CLV 490-2010/-2011 (High density): Reading field height as a 

function of the reading distance and resolution ................................................. 10-16 

Fig. 10-15: CLV 490-2010/-2011 (High density): Min. and Max. reading 











Fig. 10-19: CLV 490-3010/-3011 (High density): Reading field height as a 

function of the reading distance and resolution ................................................. 10-21 

Fig. 10-20: CLV 490-3010/-3011: (High density) Min. and Max. reading 











Fig. 10-24: CLV 490-3010/-3011: Deflection range as a function of reading 

distance, deflection angle and resolution.............................................................. 10-26 





Fig. 10-25: CLV 490-6010/-6011 (Low density): Reading field height as a 

function of the reading distance and the tilt at a resolution of 0.5 mm.....10-27 

Fig. 10-26: CLV 490-6010/-6011 (Low density): Min. and Max. reading 



Fig. 10-27: CLV 490-6010/-6011 (Low density): Min. and Max. reading 




a function of the reading distance and resolution ..............................................10-30 

Fig. 10-29: CLV 490-7010/-7011 (Low density): Reading field height as a 

function of the reading distance and tilt at a resolution of 0.5 mm.............10-31 

Fig. 10-30: Characteristics field CLV 490-7010/-7011: Scanning frequency 

as a function of the reading distance and resolution ........................................10-32 

Fig. 10-31: CLV 490-7010/-7011: Deflection range as a function of reading 

distance, deflection angle and tilt at a resolution of 0.5 mm .........................10-33 

Fig. 10-32: External parameter memory, installed on the CLV.............................................10-34 

Fig. 10-33: CLV-Setup: "Device configuration" tab with the CLV start options ..............10-35 

Fig. 10-34: CLV-Setup: dialog box for adjusting the external parameter memory........10-36 

Fig. 10-35: CLV with heater: temperature curve inside the housing ..................................10-38 

Fig. 10-36: CLV-Setup: Result display of the AutoBaud Detect function ..........................10-44 

Fig. 10-37: User interface of the "CLV-Setup" software .........................................................10-45 

Fig. 10-38: CLV-Setup: entering commands in the Terminal Emulator .............................10-49 

Fig. 10-39: Line scanner: calculating the number of scans for ladder-type bar 

code arrangements ........................................................................................................10-51 

Fig. 10-40: Line scanner: calculating the number of scans for fence-type bar 

code arrangements ........................................................................................................10-51 

Fig. 10-41: Line scanner with oscillating mirror: calculating the number of scans 

for fence-type bar code positioning .........................................................................10-52 

Fig. 10-42: One-Shot: Line scanner with oscillating mirror: calculating the number 

of scans for fence-type bar code positioning.......................................................10-53 

Fig. 10-43: Required distance between the bar codes on an object.................................10-54 

Fig. 10-44: Parameterization example: prepare a sketch of the reading situation.......10-57 

Fig. 10-45: Parameterization example: settings on the "Reading Configuration" tab..10-58 

Fig. 10-46: Parameterization example: "Edit Auto Focus/Adjustments" 

dialog window....................................................................................................................10-59 

Fig. 10-47: Parameterization example: "Edit Auto Focus/Limits" dialog window ..........10-59 

Fig. 10-48: Parameterization example: "Edit Auto Focus/Optimizations" 

dialog window....................................................................................................................10-60 

Fig. 10-49: Parameterization example: Buttons on the "Device Configuration" tab ....10-60 

Fig. 10-50: Parameterization example: "Edit Scanner Position/Angles" 

dialog window....................................................................................................................10-61 

Fig. 10-51: Parameterization example: "Edit Scanner Position/Coordinates" 

dialog window....................................................................................................................10-62 

Fig. 10-52: Parameterization example: Settings on the "Device Configuration" tab....10-62 

Fig. 10-53: Parameterization example: settings on the "Code Configuration" tab .......10-63 

Fig. 10-54: Parameterization example: "2/5 Interleaved" tab..............................................10-63 

Fig. 10-55: Parameterization example: "Host interface" tab (base setting)....................10-64 

Fig. 10-56: Parameterization example: "Data Strings" tab (basic setting).......................10-64 

Fig. 10-57: Auxiliary input via the terminal interface of the CLV ...........................................10-65 

Fig. 10-58: CLV-Setup: auxiliary input on the Terminal Emulator.........................................10-66 

Fig. 10-59: Dimensions of the angle bracket, single No. 2 013 824................................10-75 

Fig. 10-60: Dimensions of the articulated bracket No. 2 018 435....................................10-75 

Fig. 10-61: Front view of quick clamping device No. 2 016 110 with angle 

braket No. 2 0130824.................................................................................................10-75 

Fig. 10-62: Reproduction of the declaration of conformity (Page 1, reduced in size).10-85 

Fig. 10-63: Reproduction of the declaration of conformity (Page 2, reduced in size).10-86 

Fig. 10-64: Scannable bar codes with various module widths (print ratio 2:1) .............10-91 


Operating Instructions Chapter 1 


Notes on this document 

1 Notes on this document 

1.1 Purpose 

This document is a guide to the operation of the barcode scanner 

• CLV 490 with auto-focus 

in the following variations: 

• Line scanner 

– CLV 490-2010, resolution from 0.20 mm (high density) 

– CLV 490-2011, resolution from 0.20 mm (high density), with heater 

– CLV 490-0010, resolution from 0.30 mm (standard density) 

– CLV 490-0011, resolution from 0.30 mm (standard density), with heater 

– CLV 490-6010, resolution from 0.40 mm (low density) 

– CLV 490-6011, resolution from 0.40 mm (low density), with heater 

• Line scanner with oscillating mirror 

– CLV 490-3010, resolution from 0.20 mm (high density) 

– CLV 490-3011, resolution from 0.20 mm (high density), with heater 

– CLV 490-1010, resolution from 0.30 mm (standard density) 

– CLV 490-1011, resolution from 0.30 mm (standard density), with heater 

– CLV 490-7010, resolution from 0.40 mm (low density) 

– CLV 490-7011, resolution from 0.40 mm (low density), with heater 

This document provides information on 

• Mounting and connecting the device 

• Startup 

• Operating and configuring (parametrizing) the device 

• Maintenance 

• Exchanging the device without losing the parameter set 

• Special applications and procedures 

The bar code scanner with all its variants will in this manual be referred to as the "CLV", 

except where a distinction is necessary. 

1.2 Target audience 

This document is intended for persons who are responsible for the following activities: 

1.2.1 Mounting, electrical installation, maintenance and replacement 

Electricians and service technicians. 

1.2.2 Startup, operation and configuration 

Technicians and engineers. 

8 008 796/0000/25-06-2002 © SICK AG · Division Auto Ident · Germany · All rights reserved 1-1

Chapter 1 

Notes on this document 



1.3 Information content 

This document contains all the information required to mount, install, and start up the CLV 

with the factory settings. 

A series of step-by-step instructions is provided for each of these activities. 

Configuration of the CLV for the application-specific reading situations is carried out with 

the Windows-oriented PC software "CLV-Setup". Further assistance is also available in the 

form of the online help system CLV-Setup Help. The procedure for installing and operating 

the software is described in the appendix. 

For further information on the design of the bar code scanner or on bar code technology in 

general, please contact the Division Auto Ident at SICK AG. 

1.4 Symbols 

Some of the information in this document is marked specially so that you can access it 

quickly: 

Warning! 

Warnings are provided to prevent injury to operating personal or serious damage to the bar 

code scanners. 

¾ Always read warnings carefully and observe them at all times. 

Note 

Explanation 

Recommendation 

Tip 

Default 

SCANNING FREQUENCY 

"Host receive fault" 

Indicates special features or characteristics. 

Explanations provide background information on technical features. 

Recommendations help you carry out certain procedures more effectively. 

Tips explain settings in the user interface of the "CLV-Setup" program. 

Marks a section containing the factory defaults. 

This typeface is used to refer to a term in the "CLV-Setup" program. 

Icons refer to buttons in the "CLV-Setup" program. 

This typeface is used for messages output via the terminal interface of the CLV. 

This symbol is used to mark sections that describe steps carried out with the "CLV-Setup" 

program. 

This symbol refers to additional technical documentation. 

¾ 

Ö 

Here you have to do something. This symbol characterizes single-step operating 

instructions. Multiple-step operating instructions are characterized by sequential numbers. 

Here you select a function of the "CLV-Setup" user interface. 

1-2 © SICK AG · Division Auto Ident · Germany · All rights reserved 8 008 796/0000/25-06-2002



Safety information 

2 Safety information 

2.1 Authorized users 

For the CLV to function correctly and safely, it must be mounted and operated by sufficiently 

qualified personnel. 

The following qualifications are required for the various tasks involved: 

2.1.1 Mounting and maintenance 

• General technical training 

• Knowledge of the standard guidelines relating to safety at the workplace 

2.1.2 Electrical installation and replacement 

• Practical training in electrical engineering 

• Knowledge of the standard safety guidelines relating to electrical engineering 

• Experience operating the devices in the relevant application (e. g. conveyor belt) 

2.1.3 Startup, operation and configuration 

• Experience operating the devices in the relevant application (e. g. conveyor belt) 

• Knowledge of the hardware and software environment of the relevant application 

(e. g. conveyor belt) 

• Basic understanding of Windows 95 TM /98 TM , Windows NT TM or Windows XP TM 

• Ability to use an HTML browser (e. g. Netscape Navigator TM ) 

• Basic understanding of data transfer methods 

• Basic understanding of bar code technology 

2.2 Intended use 

The CLV is designed to detect and decode bar codes automatically. It is mounted in a 

reading station and reads bar codes on objects positioned on a conveyor belt, for example. 

The CLV transfers the data content of the decoded bar codes via its host interface to a host 

for further processing. 

Any warranty claims vis-à-vis SICK AG will be rendered invalid if the device is used for any 

other purpose or if changes are made to the device, also as part of the mounting and 

electrical installation procedures. 

2.3 General safety instructions and protection measures 

¾ 

Always read the general safety instructions carefully and observe them at all times. 

Please also observe the warnings in front of the operating instructions in each chapter 

of this document. 


Chapter 2 




Shock hazard! 

Depending on the type of device, the AMS 60 Connection Module (accessory) for the CLV 

is connected to a mains voltage of 230 V AC 50 Hz or 115 V AC 50/60 Hz. 

¾ When working with electrical equipment, always follow the relevant safety specifications. 

Laser beam can cause blindness! 

The CLV uses a class 2 red-light laser. Looking directly at the laser beam can seriously 

damage your eyesight. 

¾ 

¾ 

¾ 

¾ 

¾ 

Never look directly into the path of the beam (similar to sunlight). 

Do not direct the laser beam at other persons. 

When mounting and aligning the CLV, avoid reflections caused by reflective surfaces. 

Do not open the housing. 

(Opening the housing does not deactivate the laser diode.) 

Observe the most recent laser specifications (DIN EN 60825-1, latest version). 

Laser power 

The laser operates at a wave length of λ = 650 nm (visible red light). The power output at 

the reading window is max. 2.8 mW. 

The emitted radiation is not dangerous to human skin. 

Laser warnings 

The laser warning symbols applicable for Europe (Fig. 2-1) can be found on the CLV at the 

following locations: 

• The laser warning symbol on line scanners is positioned beside the reading window on 

the front side of the device. The GB/US laser warning is located on the side containing 

the electrical connections (see Fig. 3-1, Page 3-4.) 

• The laser warning symbol on line scanners with oscillating mirror is located above the 

reading window, on the cover of the mirror. The GB/US laser warning is located on the 

side containing the electrical connections. 

Max. output radiation: 

Pulse duration: 

Emitted wavelength: 

2,8 

111 

650 

mW 

s 

nm 

EN 60825-1: 1994 + A11 : 1996 

CLASS II LASER PRODUCT 

Max. Output: 


Wavelength: 

2,8 

56 

650 

mW 

us 

nm 

Compiles with 21 CFR 1040.10 

Fig. 2-1: 

Laser warning labels on the CLV (applicable for Europe) 





Note 

A set of laser warnings in German/US English and French/US English is included in the 

delivery scope. The GB English/US English warnings can be pasted over with these if 

necessary. 

If the CLV is installed in a machine/panel with the result that the laser warning labels 

are no longer visible, additional warnings (not included in the scope of delivery) must 

be provided on the machine beside the emergence aperture of the laser beam. 

Internal protective circuits 

The CLV is equipped with monitoring circuits that deactivate the laser diode in the event of 

a malfunction. 

Activation and deactivation of the laser diode is controlled by the reading pulse trigger. 

A timer (laser timeout) automatically deactivates the laser diode in Reading mode ("Sensor 

input" and "Serial interface" trigger mode) if the reading interval has not ended after 

10 minutes (default setting). However, it does not end the reading interval. In this case, the 

CLV outputs the message: 

"Laser safety timeout" 

on the terminal interface. The reading interval must be terminated by resetting the trigger 

signal. The laser diode is activated again by the next reading trigger. 

In the Percentage Evaluation mode, Adjusting mode and Show CP-limits as well as in 

the Free-running Reading mode the laser diode is constantly activated. 

Note 

In the Reading mode, the CLV carries out a distance measurement referencing at regular 

intervals. During referencing, it turns the laser diode on for a maximum of 10 seconds. 

2.4 Quick stop and quick restart 

2.4.1 Stopping the CLV 

¾ 

Switch off the power supply. 

This can result in loss of the following (at the most): 

• The application-specific parameter set, if it was stored temporarily in the CLV 

• The last reading result 

• Daily operating data 

(operating hours counter, number of reading intervals, Good Read count, maximum 

duration trigger, minimum duration trigger, average identification quality) 

2.4.2 Restarting the CLV 

¾ 

Switch on the power supply. 

The CLV resumes operation with the parameter set that was last stored permanently 

and reset the daily operating data. 


Chapter 2 




2.5 Environmental information 

The CLV is designed to cause minimum impact on the environment. It does not contain any 

silicone-based materials and, therefore, does not represent any problems for paint sprayers 

in paint shops, for example. 

2.5.1 Power requirements 

The power requirements depend on the variants: 

• The line scanner has a typical power consumption of 9 W and max. 16 W 

• The line scanner with oscillating mirror has a typical power consumption of 9 W and 

max. 18 W 

• The line scanner equipped with an integrated heater has a typical power consumption 

of 75 W and max. 90 W 

• The line scanner with oscillating mirror equipped with an integrated heater has a typical 

power consumption of 75 W and max. 100 W 

The values are given for devices with disconnected switching outputs. 

2.5.2 Disposal after removal from service 

Always dispose irreparable devices in a manner that is not harmful to the environment and 

in accordance with the applicable national waste disposal regulations. The CLV can be separated 

into recyclable secondary raw materials and special-category waste (electronic 

scrap). 

See also Chapter 7.3 Disposal, Page 7-2. 

SICK AG currently does not accept delivery of unusable or irreparable devices. 




Product description 

3 Product description 

3.1 Design 

3.1.1 Scope of delivery 

The CLV is supplied with the following in the packing: 

• An information sheet (notes on device) with terminal diagram and Quick Start instructions 

• An additional set of Class 2 laser warning labels (self-adhesive) in German/US English 

and French/US English 

Depending on the number of devices ordered, one or more sets of technical documentation 

comprising: 

• These CLV 490 Operating Instructions in English and German 

• A CD-ROM containing the "CLV-Setup" program for Windows TM , the CLV-Setup Help online 

help system, and the I-ViewPro TM HTML browser 

Chapter 10.13 Accessories, Page 10-71 contains an overview of the available accessories, 

connection modules, cables, and connectors, as well as sensors for generating the reading 

pulse. 

3.1.2 Variants 

The CLV is currently available in the following variants: 

High density 

Standard 

Low density 

Type (red light) Part. no. Scanning method Resolution Reading window Heater 

CLV 490-2010 1 019 311 Line scanner From 0.2 mm End No 

CLV 490-3010 1 019 313 Line scanner with oscillating mirror From 0.2 mm Side No 

CLV 490-2011 1 019 312 Line scanner From 0.2 mm End Yes 

CLV 490-3011 1 019 314 Line scanner with oscillating mirror From 0.2 mm Side Yes 


CLV 490-1010 1 016 959 Line scanner with oscillating mirror From 0.3 mm Side Yo 

CLV 490-0011 1 016 960 Line scanner From 0,3 mm End Yes 



CLV 490-7010 1 019 094 Line scanner with oscillating mirror From 0.4 mm Side No 

CLV 490-6011 1 019 095 Line scanner From 0.4 mm End Yes 


Table 3-1: CLV variants 


Chapter 3 




3.1.3 System requirements 

CLV without heater 

The following are required to start up and operate the CLV without heater: 

1. A SICK Connection Module to provide the power supply and connect the data and 

function interfaces. 

Available types: 

–For connecting one CLV: 

AMV 60-011 (no. 1 017 134) for 18 ... 30 V DC, enclosure rating max. IP 54 

AMS 60-013 (no. 1 017 139) for 230 V AC 50 Hz/24 V DC, 

enclosure rating max. IP 54 

AMS 60-012 (no. 1 017 140) for 115 V AC 50/60 Hz/24 V DC, 

enclosure rating max. IP 54 

AMS 100-011 (no. 6 021 105) for 18 ... 30 V DC, enclosure rating max. IP 65 

–For connecting two CLVs: 



– or – 

Alternatively, a non-SICK Power pack with a voltage output of 18 ... 30 V DC pursuant 

to IEC 742 (functional extra-low voltage) and a minimum power output of 20 W. 

Cable no. 2 020 264 (3 m) with 15-pin D Sub HD connector and one open end for 

connecting the CLV to the non-SICK Power pack (supply voltage). 

2. The following operating voltages/power output values: 

– AMV 60-011: 18 ... 30 V DC (to IEC 742), min. 20 W 




– AMS 60-013: 230 V AC ±10 % 50 Hz 

– AMS 60-012: 115 V AC ±10 % 50/60 Hz 

3. Fitting cables see Chapter 5.2.2 Prefabricated cables (overview), Page 5-2. 

4. With external clock pulse supply via the "Sensor" switching input: a suitable reading pulse 

sensor for signaling an object with a bar code, e.g. a photoelectric reflex switch. 

5. With object distance detection via the "IN 0 ... IN 4" switching inputs: suitable sensors 

for multi-stage dynamic focus control, e. g. photoelectric reflex switches. 

6. A PC (min. 80486, 66 MHz, 16 MB RAM, CD drive, a serial port (COM x), mouse (recommended)) 

with Windows 95 TM /98 TM , Windows NT TM or Windows XP TM . 

7. An RS 232 data connection cable with two 9-pin D Sub sockets for connecting the PC 

to the terminal interface of the CLV in the Connection Module, e. g. no. 2 014 054. 

Pin 2 (RxD) and Pin 3 (TxD) are crossed. 

8. An HTML browser, e. g. Netscape Navigator TM , or the I-ViewPro TM browser supplied with 

the device (see Chapter 3.1.1 Scope of delivery, Page 3-1) for using the online help system 

CLV-Setup Help. 

9. The appropriate bus connection module BMV/BMH 10 (available on request) for connecting 

the CLV to the Interbus-S, Profibus DP, the Device Net or to Ethernet. 

10. For connection of the CLV to the CAN Scanner Network: the Operating Instructions 

“Application of the CAN interface“ (no. 8 009 180, English edition). 





CLV with heater 

The following are required to start up and operate the CLV with heater: 

1. A SICK Connection Module from the AMV 100 or AMV 200 series to provide the power 

supply and connect the data and function interfaces. 

Available types: 

– For connecting one CLV: AMV 100-011 (no. 6 021 105) for 24 V DC, max. IP 65 

– For connecting two CLVs: AMV 200-011 (no. 6 021 106) for 24 V DC, max. IP 65 

– or – 

Alternatively, a non-SICK Power pack with a voltage output of 24 V DC +20 %/–10 % 

to IEC 742 (functional extra-low voltage) and a minimum power output of 100 W. 

Cable no. 2 020 264 (3 m) with 15-pin D Sub HD connector and one open end for 

connecting the CLV to the non-SICK Power pack (supply voltage). 

2. The following operating voltages/power output values: 

– AMV 100-011: 24 V DC +20 %/–10 % (pursuant to IEC 742), min. 100 W 

– AMV 200-011: 24 V DC +20 %/–10 % (pursuant to IEC 742), min. 200 W 

3. See pos. 3 under CLV without heater 


Chapter 3 




3.1.4 Design 

➋ 

➋ 

➋ 

Line scanner 

(front-end reading window) 

Line scanner with oscillating mirror 

(side reading window) 

➋ 

➊ 

➌ 

➍ 

➏ 

➎ 

➐ 

➑ 

Legend 

➊ Drilled hole, Ø 3.6 mm, 

6 mm deep 

➋ Laser warning labels 

➌ Blind hole thread M 6, 7 mm deep, 

for securing the device 

Fig. 3-1: Design of the CLV 490 

➒ 

➍ Blind hole thread M 4, 

10 mm deep, for the connector 

cover 

➎ "Host/Term" connector 

15-pin D Sub HD plug 

➏ "I/O" connector, 

15-pin D Sub HD socket 

➐ LEDs (status indicators) 

➑ Reading window 

➒ Mark for count direction of the code 

position (deflection direction of the 

laser beam) 





3.2 Method of operation 

The CLV first scans the bar code with a scan line and then decodes it. The data is forwarded 

via the main data interface (serial host interface) to a host/PC for further processing. An 

overview of the CLV functions is provided in Fig. 3-2. 

CLV 490 

Photoelectric 

switch 

Reading pulse 

"Sensor" 

Scanner 

Decoder 

Interface 

"Terminal" 

"Host" 

PC 

Operation 

Parameterization, 

etc. 

HOST 

Further processing 

of the reading result 

Signal 1) 

Focal control 

Trigger One-Shot 

Conveyer increment 

1) if required 

"IN 0" 

"IN 1" 

"IN 2" 

"IN 3" 

"IN 4" 

V S 

"Result 1" 

"Result 2" 

"Result 3" 

"Result 4" 

Status display 

e. g. Device Ready 

e. g. Good Read 

e. g. No Read 

e. g. Match 1 

Fig. 3-2: 

Block diagram: CLV functions 

The CLV is equipped with two decoders: 

• The SMART decoder (SICK Modular Advanced Recognition Technology) for decoding 

bar codes with small code height, bar codes that are dirty or damaged, as well as bar 

codes that are tilted excessively (azimuth angle) 

• The tried-and-tested standard decoder of the CLV series 

The CLV derives useful diagnosis data from the reading process and can transfer it to also 

the host. It also records operating data that can be interrogated at any time. The quality of 

the read can be checked in percentage evaluation mode. 

To start the reading process when an object is located in the reading field, the CLV requires 

a suitable trigger. This opens an internal time window ("reading interval") in the CLV. In the 

default configuration, this trigger is supplied by an external reading pulse sensor. Alternative 

trigger sources include Free-running mode or a command via the host interface (for more 

complex applications: OTC trigger). 

The current operating status is indicated by four LEDs. 

If the trigger is supplied externally, the "Sensor" switching input instructs the CLV to start the 

reading process. The five "IN 0 ... IN 4" switching inputs switch the focus position in 

response to certain events, as an alternative to the autofocus function. The "IN 3" and 

"IN 4” inputs can also be assigned special functions. The four "Result 1 ... Result 4" switching 

outputs can be assigned to different functions for displaying the result status and also 

control external devices, such as a PLC. 

The CLV is operated and configured via the auxiliary interface (serial terminal interface) using 

the "CLV-Setup" software or via the host interface/terminal interface using command 

strings. 

System, warning, and error messages help you to configure the device and to locate the 

source of errors during startup and reading mode. 


Chapter 3 




3.2.1 Autofocus function 

The autofocus function enables the CLV to detect the distance of an object during the reading 

process, without the need for external sensors, and then adjusts the focus position automatically 

to the reading plane of the bar code. In order to do so, the CLV measures the 

object distance each time in its reading field in front of the reading window and internally 

creates a distance profile. Following this, it positions the focus on the object. 

3 operating modes are provided for various applications: 

• Minimum distance: the CLV focuses on the minimum distance in the distance profile 

and ignores the background in the reading field. Application: with unobstructed view of 

the object without any surrounding objects protruding into the reading plane. One object 

with bar code(s) only is inside the reading field during one reading pulse. 

• Differential background: the distance profile of the reading field background is programmed 

(teach-in) in the CLV without any objects present. During the reading process, 

the CLV then focuses on the object which it recognizes by comparing it to the distance 

profile of the background. Application: with unobstructed view of the object restricted 

by other objects that protrude into the reading plane. One object with barcode(s) only 

is inside the reading field during one reading pulse. 

• Differential background and tracking: if several objects with different distances are 

positioned in the reading field at the same time (distance conflict), the CLV focuses on 

the object that is nearest to but has not exceed its internal focus switchover point. 

Application: in OTS operation (applications with tracking by the Omni Tracking Controller 

OTC 400). 

The distance profile of the background can also be displayed in the "CLV-Setup" program. 

The reading field is defined by the autofocus range, the aperture angle, and (in the case of 

line scanners with oscillating mirror) also by the angle of deflection. The park setting of the 

focus position, from which the device focuses for each read, can be specified in addition to 

a time and/or position-related delay (timeout or hysteresis). If necessary, an offset can be 

defined for the focus position to be set by the measurement. The depth of field, which radiates 

in the direction of the scan lines and is caused by the V-principle of the beam deflection, 

is optimized as a result (Fig. 3-3). 

Measured distance 

Optimum focus position: 

measured distance plus offset for maximum 

Depth of field (DOF) 

Fig. 3-3: 

Optimization of the depth of field for the object 





3.2.2 Event-controlled dynamic focus control 

As an alternative to the autofocus function, the CLV can switch its focus position in response 

to certain events and thus dynamically cover a large reading range. A maximum of eight reading 

ranges can be defined as distance configurations for this purpose and approached 

consecutively in reading mode (see Fig. 3-4). 

Reading 

field height 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

Focus position 

Reading distance 

Focus 

position 

DC 5 

DC 4 

DC 3 

DC 2 

DC 1 

DC 6 DC 7 DC 8 

Fig. 3-4: 

DC = Distance Configuration 


Dynamic focus control: classification of the reading range in distance configurations 

The switch over takes place in response to changes in the object distance (with reads from 

above: object height detection). The trigger source for the switchover is a signal combination 

at the "IN 0 ... IN 4" switching inputs, a command on the host interface/terminal interface or 

the integrated timer (e. g. for search mode). Additional in the case of the line scanner with 

oscillating mirror also the oscillating mirror reversal points. The distance configurations are 

assigned to the switchover sequence by means of a programmable assignment table. The 

distance measurement of the autofocus function can be additionally used to define the distance 

configurations. 

3.2.3 Scan procedure variants 

Line scanner (standard device) 

Generates a scan line; due to the V-principle of the beam generation, the reading field height 

(the useful length of the scan line for evaluation purposes) is dependent on the reading 

distance. 


The oscillating mirror also deflects the scan line perpendicularly to the scan direction at both 

sides around the neutral position with a low oscillating frequency. As a result, the CLV can 

also scan larger areas for bar codes. Due to the V-principle of beam generation, the reading 

field height is dependent on the reading distance. 

In addition to parking (fixed position) and simple deflection with maximum amplitude, optimized 

oscillating mirror functions are also available: 

• Oscillating with variable deflection amplitude per distance configuration 

• One-Shot: one-off, defined deflection per reading pulse (forward and return phase) 


Chapter 3 




3.2.4 Additional components 

Heater 

The CLV can be permanently equipped with a heater for applications involving temperatures 

up to max. –35 °C (e. g. in a freezer). 

The design, technical data, and power-up behavior of the CLV are described in Chapter 10.4 

Optional heating, Page 10-38. 

External parameter memory 

The external parameter memory is located in a connector cover which, when mounted, 

covers the two electrical terminals on the CLV (IP 65). The parameter memory saves you 

time when a CLV is replaced locally by providing a copy of the current parameter set. In other 

words, you do not have to configure the new device. 

For information on applications and operating procedures, see Chapter 10.3 Installing and 

operating the external parameter memory, Page 10-34. 

3.3 Indicators and control elements 

3.3.1 Control elements 

The CLV is operated and configured via the terminal interface (auxiliary interface) using the 

"CLV-Setup" program or using command strings sent via the host interface/terminal interface. 

A variety of parameter options allow you to adapt the device to a wide range of applications. 

The following can be defined: 

• The configuration of the code types 

• The read, evaluation, and output properties 

• The communication parameters of the host interface 

• The structure of the data output string for "Good Read" and "No Read" on the host interface 

• The function of the terminal interface 

Chapter 10.6 Installing and operating the "CLV-Setup" program, Page 10-41 describes the 

procedure for installing the "CLV-Setup" program and explains how to use it. The parameterization 

(configuration) procedure is explained in Chapter 6.4 Configuring (parameterization) 

the CLV, Page 6-5. 

3.3.2 Function of the LEDs 

Four LEDs indicate the operating status, activity of the laser diode, reading result status, and 

data transfer on the host interface. The LEDs are located on the rear of the device (Fig. 3-5). 

If the optional external parameter memory is connected, the LEDs also indicate whether the 

memory was successfully accessed. 

Device Ready 

Sensor 

Read Result 

Data 

Fig. 3-5: 

LEDs 





The meaning of the LEDs in the various operating modes/functions is shown in Table 3-2 

and Table 3-3. 

CLV without external parameter memory 

Operating mode LED Display Function 

Start Device Ready Green • Lights up after power-up if the self-test was successful 

Subsequent behavior depends on selected start option 

Start option: START WITH EXTERNAL PARAMETERS (DEFAULT) 

• Lights up constantly (CLV has loaded internal parameter set) 

Start option: START WITH INTERNAL PARAMETERS: 


Start option: START WITH COPY INTERN -> EXTERN: 

• Blinks constantly together with the "Read Result" LED 1) 

(CLV has loaded internal parameter set) 

Read Result Green Start option: START WITH COPY INTERN -> EXTERN: 

• Blinks constantly together with the "Device Ready" LED 1) 

Reading mode Device Ready Green • Lights up constantly 

• Extinguishes with new operating mode/function 

Sensor Green • Lights up if reading diode is active 

(The laser diode is activated/deactivated by reading pulse) 

• Lights up constantly in Free-running mode, since laser diode is always active 

Read Result Green LED is linked to the "Result 2" switching output and indicates the selected result 

status for the defined pulse duration of the output. 

• Lights up after a successful read (default: Good Read) 

• Lights up if the match code comparison is active, the bar code read matches the 

specified match code(s) and the corresponding result status output is selected 

for the "Result 2" output 

Data Yellow • Flickers when the CLV transfers data to the host on the host interface 

Percentage Sensor Green • Lights up constantly, as Free-running mode is active 

evaluation Read Result Green Behavior depends on the reading quality: 

• Extinguishes if reading rate < 30 % 

• Blinks twice a second if reading rate 30 % ... 70 % 

• Blinks five times a second if reading rate 70 % ... 90 % 

• Lights up constantly if reading rate > 90 % 

Adjusting mode Sensor Green • Lights up constantly, as Free-running mode is active 

Show CP-limits Sensor Green • Blinks bright/dark alternately, in the frequency with which the scan line is (partially) 

masked out 

1) Set the start option to START WITH THE INTERNAL PARAMETERS on the DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab in the "CLV-Setup" program. Download to CLV! 

Table 3-2: Meaning of LEDs: CLV without external parameter memory 


Chapter 3 




CLV with external parameter memory connected 


Start Device Ready Green • Lights up after power-up if the self-test was successful 

Subsequent behavior depends on selected start option: 

Start option: START WITH EXTERNAL PARAMETERS (default): 

• Blinks for approx. 10 s before lighting up constantly 

(CLV has loaded the parameter set from the external parameter 

memory and starts reading mode straight away) 

• Blinks for approx. 10 s together with the "Read Result" LED, then lights up 

constantly. 

(CLV has loaded the parameter set from the external parameter memory with 

tolerated errors 1) and starts reading mode straight away) 

• Lights up constantly 

(CLV could not find an external parameter memory and loads the internal parameter 

set instead) 


(The external parameter memory is either empty, contains the parameter set for 

a different CLV type, or is corrupt. 

CLV has loaded the internal parameter set. It starts Reading mode but does not 

output data over the host interface.) 

Start option: START WITH INTERNAL PARAMETERS: 



• Blinks alternately with the "Read Result" LED for approx. 10s before lighting 

up constantly 

(CLV has successfully copied the internal parameter set to the external memory 

and has reset the start option to START WITH EXTERNAL PARAMETERS). 

CLV has loaded the internal parameter set. 


(The external parameter memory is either not connected or corrupt, or the 

parameter set is too large to be copied). CLV has loaded the internal parameter 

set. 

Read Result Green Start option: START WITH EXTERNAL PARAMETERS (default): 

• Blinks for approx. 10 s together with "Device Ready" LED 1) (see above) or 

• Blinks constantly together with the "Device Ready" LED 2) (see above) 


• Blinks alternately with "Device Ready" LED for approx. 10 s (see above) or 

• Blinks constantly together with the "Device Ready" LED 2) (see above) 

Reading mode Device Ready Green • Lights up constantly 

• Extinguishes with new operating mode/function 

Sensor Green • Lights up if reading diode active 

(The laser diode is activated/deactivated by the reading pulse) 

• Lights up constantly in Free-running mode, since the laser diode is constantly 

active 

Read Result Green LED is linked to the "Result 2" output and indicates the selected result status for the 

defined pulse duration of the output. 

• Lights up after a successful read (Good Read) 

• Lights up if the match code comparison is active, the bar code read matches the 

specified match code(s) and the corresponding result output is selected for the 

"Result 2" output 

1) We recommend that you check the parameter set manually, e. g. by printing out the entire configuration. For troubleshooting, see also Chapter 8.3.2 LED error messages 

for the external parameter memory, Page 8-5 

2) Stops blinking when you switch from Reading mode to Parameterization mode 

Table 3-3: Meaning of LEDs: CLV with external parameter memory 






Reading mode 

(contd.) 

Data Yellow • Flickers when the CLV transmits data to the host over the host interface 

Percentage Sensor Green • Lights up constantly, since Free-running mode is active 

evaluation Read Result Green Behavior dependent on the reading quality: 

• Extinguishes if reading rate < 30 % 

• Blinks twice a second if reading rate 30 % ... 70 % 

• Blinks five times a second if reading rate 70 % ... 90 % 

• Lights up constantly if reading rate > 90 % 

Adjusting mode Sensor Green • Lights up constantly, since Free-running mode is active 

Show CP-limits Sensor Green • Blinks bright/dark alternately, in the frequency with which the scan line is (partially) 

masked out 

Table 3-3: Meaning of LEDs: CLV with external parameter memory 


Chapter 3 




Notes 




4 Installation 

Installation 

4.1 Installation sequence 

• Change the language version of the laser warning label (if necessary) 

• Select the mounting location for the CLV 

• Align the CLV with the bar code 

• Mount the CLV 

• Mount the AMV/S 60 Connection Module 

• Connect the CLV to the AMV/S 60 Connection Module 

• Adjust the CLV so that it is in line with the bar code 

• Mount the reading pulse sensor for external triggering the reading pulse 

• Option with event-controlled dynamic focus control: 

mount the sensors for detecting the object distance 

4.2 Preparations 

4.2.1 Required components 

• CLV Bar Code Scanner 

4.2.2 Required accessories 

• SICK mounting bracket for the CLV: 

depending on the order, angle bracket no. 2 013 824, articulated bracket 

no. 2 018 435, or quick-clamping device no. 2 016 110 with securing material for 

the CLV 

– or – 

Alternatively, if the bracket is supplied by the user 

– Stable mounting device that allows the alignment of the CLV to be varied in the x and 

y axes. The weight of the CLV (line scanner) is 1.5 kg and 2.2 kg as a line scanner 

with oscillating mirror. 

– 2 screws M 6 for the CLV. The screw length depends on the wall thickness of the 

bracket used. Depth of engagement in CLV max. 7 mm from housing surface. 

• AMV/S 60 Connection Module (not included in the scope of supply of the CLV) 

• Reading pulse sensor for external reading pulse triggering, e. g. photoelectric reflex 

switch/ photoelectric proximity switch (not included in the scope of supply of the CLV) 

• Option with event-controlled dynamic focus control: sensors for detecting the object 

distance, e. g. photoelectric reflex switches/photoelectric proximity switches (not 

included in the scope of supply of the CLV) 

4.2.3 Required auxiliary parts 

• 2 screws M 6 for securing the SICK mounting bracket to the base. The screw length 

depends on the wall thickness of the base. 

• Set of laser warning labels (if necessary) 

• Tool 

• Measuring tape (up to 3 000 mm) 

• Protractor 


Chapter 4 

Installation 



4.2.4 Replacing the laser warning label 

If necessary, replace the GB/US laser warning label with the required language (Fig. 4-1). 

The device is delivered with a set of laser warnings in: 

• German/US laser warning and 

• French/US laser warning 

See also Chapter 2.3 General safety instructions and protection measures, Page 2-1. 

Supplied laser warnings: 

RAYONNEMENT NE PAS REGARDER DANS LE FAISCEAU 

APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 2 

Puissance max. du rayonnement: 2,8 mW 

Durée d'impulse : 111 s 

Longueur d'onde émis : 650 nm 

EN 60825-1:1994 + A11:1996 

C A U T I O N 

LASER LIGHT DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM 


Max. output: 2.8 mW 

Pulse duration: 56 s 

Wavelength: 650 nm 

Compiles with 21CFR 1040.10 

LASERSTRAHLUNG NICHT IN DENSTRAHL BLICKEN 

LASER KLASSE 2 

Max. Leistung: 2,8 mW 

Impulsdauer: 111 s 

Wellenlänge: 650 nm 

EN 60825-1:1994 + A11:1996 

C A U T I O N 

LASER LIGHT DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM 


Max. output: 2.8 mW 

Pulse duration: 56 s 


Compiles with 21CFR 1040.10 

Fig. 4-1: 

Line scanner: replacing the laser warning labels 

4.2.5 Selecting the mounting location 

When you select the mounting location, the distance between the CLV and the host and 

between the CLV and the bar code are extremely important. 

Distance between the CLV and the host 

The CLV can be mounted at a maximum distance of 1 200 m from the host without a 

connection to the SICK network or a bus. In practice, however, the distance depends on the 

physical configuration of the host interface and the data transfer rate (see Table 5-7, 

Page 5-8). 

Distance between the CLV and the AMV/S 60 Connection Module 

The AMV/S 60 Connection Module should not be located further than 10 m from the CLV, 

since the "CLV-Setup" program on the PC accesses the terminal interface (RS 232) of the 

CLV via this module. 




Installation 

4.2.6 Mounting accessories 

The CLV is secured in position using the two tapped blind holes (M 6) above the electrial 

connections. Fig. 4-2 shows the location of the threads near the line scanner. 

The dimensions of the CLV housing are shown in Fig. 9-1 to Fig. 9-2, Page 9-4. 

Drilled hole, ∅ 3.6 mm, 

6 mm deep 

Blind hole thread, M 6, 

7 mm deep 

Max. output radiation: 


Emitted wavelength: 

2,8 

111 

650 

mW 

us 

nm 

EN 60825-1: 1994 + A11 : 1996 


Max. Output: 2,8 mW 

Pulse duration: 56 us 


Compiles with 21 CFR 1040.10 

38.5 

10 10 10 

33.4 

78 

43.3 

56 

21 

12 

Fig. 4-2: 

Line scanner: position of the securing threads on the CLV 

The CLV can be mounted using the SICK bracket: 

• Mounting bracket, single no. 2 013 824 

• Articulated bracket (2 x mounting bracket, single) no. 2 018 435 

• Quick-clamping device no. 2 016 110 

The brackets are designed to support a variety of mounting positions and alignments in two 

planes. Fig. 4-3 shows two mounting examples. 

The elongated holes in the mounting bracket no. 2 013 824 and in the articulated bracket 

no. 2 018 435 allow the CLV to be adjusted with a freedom of rotation of ±15°. 

Quick-clamping 

device 

Mounting 

bracket 

Fig. 4-3: 

Line scanner: Mounting possibilities of the CLV 

The dimensions of the mounting brackets are shown in Chapter 10.14 Dimensioned drawings 

of the accessories, Page 10-75 


Chapter 4 

Installation 



4.2.7 Distance between the CLV and the bar code 

Basic alignment between the CLV and the bar code 

Depending on the application, the line scanner or line scanner with oscillating mirror versions 

of the CLV is used. Fig. 4-4 shows how the device is aligned with the bar code on the object 

for each of the two scanning methods. 

Line scanner 

Line scanner with 

oscillating mirror 

Fig. 4-4: 

Scanning methods: alignment with bar code and conveyor direction 

Reading distance from the bar code and aperture angle α 

The distance between the reading window of the CLV and the bar code must not exceed 

the technical limits. The height of the reading field is shown as a function of the reading 

distance for various resolutions (module widths) depending on the CLV type in Chapter 10.2 

Specification diagrams, Page 10-1. 

Fig. 4-5 shows the definition of the reading distance a from the reading window and of the 

aperture angle α each of the two scanning methods. 

Line scanner 


α 

α 

Reading distance a 

Reading distance a 

105° 

Fig. 4-5: 

Definition of the reading distance a and of the aperture angle α 

The useful aperture angle is typically 56° for the line scanner and max. 50° for the line scanner 

with oscillating mirror. Due to the V-principle of beam deflection, the reading field height 

(for evaluating the useful length of the scan line) depends on the readling distance. 




Installation 

Angular alignment of the CLV 

The alignment of the CLV is optimum when the scan line travels over the bar code lines 

almost at a right angle (90°) (Fig. 4-4). All possible reading angles that can occur between 

the scan line and the bar code must be taken into consideration (Fig. 4-6 and Table 4-1). 

Reading 

range 

α: Azimuth angle (tilt) 

β: Angle of inclination (pitch) 

γ: Angle of rotation (skew) 

CLV 

Reading 

distance 

Fig. 4-6: 

Line scanner: Reading angle between the scan line and the bar code 

Angle Limit value 

Tilt α (azimuth) max. 45° 

Pitch β max. 45° 

Skew γ max. 45° 

Table 4-1: Permissible reading angles between the scan line and bar code 

Avoiding surface reflection 

If the light from the scan line strikes the surface of the bar code vertically, interference may 

be caused by reflections when the returned light is received. To avoid surface reflection, the 

CLV must be mounted in such a way that the emitted light is tilted slightly with respect to the 

vertical axis (Fig. 4-7). 

Line scanner 


15° 

15° 

105° 

(Top view) 

(Side view) 

Fig. 4-7: 

Avoiding surface reflections: Angle between the emitted light and the bar code (tilted 

away from the vertical axis) 

In the case of the line scanner with oscillating mirror, the laser beam is emitted at an angle 

of 105° with respect to the housing as it passes through the neutral position (CW = 50) while 

oscillating. The device can only be flush-mounted with the conveyor belt with limited deflection 

ranges. Otherwise, the device must also be mounted at an angle of 15° to ensure 

that the deflection ranges are symmetric. 


Chapter 4 

Installation 



Note 

In oscillating mode with variable amplitude, the scan line must always sweep the neutral 

position (CW = 50). This means that oscillation is not possible in the range 60 CW to 80 CW, 

for example, but is possible in the range 40 CW to 80 CW. 

4.2.8 Count direction of the code position CP and code angle CW 

Explanation 

The CLV can scan and decode several bar codes with each read. In doing so, it determines 

the specific local reading diagnosis data for each bar code: 

• The position (CP value) of the center of the bar code within the scan line 

• (Scanning method using the oscillating mirror) also the angle of deflection of the scan 

line (CW value) at which the center of the bar code is recorded 

Fig. 4-8 shows the count direction of the code position and code angle. In the case of the 

line scanner, the count direction of the code position is marked by a small triangle above 

the reading window. 

By determining this data, the device can separate identical bar codes (code type, code 

length, and data content identical) and assign the bar code data in the reading result to its 

position on the object. 

Line scanner 



90 

100 

CP 

CW 

10 

0 

100 

CP 

0 

Scanning direction 

Aperture angle α (opening angle) in the scanning direction: 1° = 1.5 CP (56° = 90 CP) 

Deflection angle of the scan line crosswise to the scanning direction: 1° = 2 CW (20° = 40 CW) 

Fig. 4-8: 

Count direction of the code position CP in the scan line and of the code angle CW for the 


Tip 

In the default setting, the CLV does not output the "CP" and "CW" values (line scanner with 

oscillating mirror only) in the reading result on the host interface. If this is required to 

evaluate the result in the host, the values can be included in the separator of the output 

string using the "CLV-Setup" program. 




Installation 

Configuring the separator: 

1. Choose the DATA STRINGS tab. 

2. Click the SEPARATOR field. 

The EDIT PARAMETER TFS dialog box is displayed. 

3. In the list field, click the CP and/or CW parameters. 

CP and/or CW then appears in the top line. 

4. Confirm your selections with OK. 

5. Download the data to the CLV by clicking in the toolbar. 

The DOWNLOAD PARAMETERS dialog box is then displayed. 

6. Confirm the dialog box by choosing PERMANENT. 

The CLV outputs the CP value and the CW value on the host interface for each bar code 

in the reading result. The values are displayed as a 3-digit number in the associated separator. 

4.3 Mounting and adjusting the device 

4.3.1 Mounting the CLV 

1. Prepare the base for mounting the bracket as described in Chapter 4.2.2 Required accessories, 

Page 4-1. 

2. Place the object containing the bar code within the reading field of the CLV (in the position 

at which it is to be read) with the conveyor belt switched off. 

3. Align the CLV with the bar code (in accordance with the scanning method) in such a way 

that 

– with the line scanner the back of the device with the LEDs is almost parallel with the 

bar code surface, 

– with the line scanner with oscillating mirror, the broad side wall (back of the oscillating 

mirror) is almost parallel with the bar code surface 

All of the possible reading angles must be taken into consideration (see Fig. 4-6, 

Page 4-5). 

4. If it is relevant for the evaluation, note the count direction of the code position and code 

angle (see Fig. 4-8, Page 4-6). 

5. Mount the CLV bracket on the base. 

Risk of damage to the housing! 

The maximum depth of engagement of the two blind hole threads M 6 is 7 mm. 

Longer screws will damage the housing. 

¾ Use screws with the correct length. 

6. Screw the screws M 6 through the bracket into the blind hole threads of the CLV. 

7. Tighten the screws slightly. 

8. Adjust the CLV as described below. 


Chapter 4 

Installation 



4.3.2 Adjusting the CLV 

The CLV can be adjusted in Percentage Evaluation mode. In this mode, the CLV displays the 

quality of the bar code reads that enter the CLV reading field statically (the object is not moved 

on the conveyor belt). The CLV performs 100 scans and evaluates the reading 

quality statistically. It then outputs the reading results every 2 s on the terminal interface. 

The behavior of the "Read Result" LED also indicates the reading quality: 

– The LED does not light up if the CLV cannot read the bar code (reading quality < 30 %). 

– If the CLV is having problems reading the bar code (reading quality 30 % ... 90 %), the 

LED blinks. 

– The CLV is aligned optimally when the LED lights up constantly (reading quality > 90 %). 

The scanning frequency in the default setting is 800 Hz. 

1. Connect the CLV to the AMV/S 60 Connection Module and switch on the power supply 

(see Chapter 5.5.3 Connecting the supply voltage, Page 5-13). 

After it has started, the CLV confirms that the self-test was successfuly and switches to 

reading mode ("Device Ready" LED lights up). 

2. Connect the PC to the terminal interface of CLV via the RS 232 line using the internal 

9-pin "Service" plug of the AMV/S 60 (see Chapter 5.5.5 Connecting the CAN interface, 

Page 5-15). 

3. Start Windows and the "CLV-Setup" program (see Chapter 10.6.3 Starting CLV-Setup, 

Page 10-43). 

Choosing the standard decoder: 

4. Choose the CODE CONFIGURATION tab. 

5. Click the STANDARD option in the DECODER section. 

6. Download the settings to the CLV by clicking on the toolbar. 


7. Confirm the dialog box by choosing TEMPORARY. 

The CLV then operates with the standard decoder. 

Activating Percentage Evaluation mode: 

8. From the VIEW menu, choose PERCENTAGE EVALUATION. 

The dialog box for entering the distance configuration appears. 

9. Click the relevant distance configuration for the reading distance: 

– with autofocus mode the distance configuration no. 1 

– with event-controlled dynamic focus control the distance configuration that matches 

the reading distance of the object (default: no. 1, focus position F = 1 200 mm). 

10. Confirm the dialog box with OK. 

The Terminal Emulator is launched and displays the reading result continuously (see 

Chapter 6.5.2 Percentage evaluation, Page 6-22). 

Monitor the reading quality (%) during each of the subsequent steps! 


In the "Percent Evaluation" mode, the CLV behaves in the following manner: 

– in "Oscillating" mode (default setting: oscillating with a fixed amplitude), the CLV shuts 

off oscillation and positions the scan line under the angle CW = 50 (corresponds to 

an angle of deflection of 105°). This position cannot be altered. 

– in "One-Shot" mode, the CLV also positions the scan line under the angle CW = 50 

– in "Set Position" mode, the scan line’s selected position remains unchanged. 




Installation 

Performing fine adjustment: 

11. Align the CLV in such a way that the angle between the scan line and the bars on the 

bar code CLV is almost 90°. The oscillating mirror must be aligned in such a way that 

the scan line is located at the center of the bar code, perpendicular to the bar code lines, 

when it is in the neutral position (CW = 50). 

12. To avoid interfering reflections, tilt the line scanner away from the vertical axis so that 

the light strikes the bar code at an angle of approx. 105° (see Fig. 4-7, Page 4-5). 

13. If necessary, position the scan line exactly at the direct center of the bar code. 

Chapter 4.3.3 Adjusting mode below. 

14. Move objects carrying bar codes into the CLV reading field manually under realistic 

conditions and check the reading result. If the objects are aligned randomly, or if the bar 

code is located at different positions (angles), ensure that the limit values of the 

permissible reading angles are not exceeded. 

15. Adjust the CLV in such a way that the good read rate is between 70... 100%. 

With event-controlled dynamic focus control, for each defined reading range (distance 

configuration), check the selected focus position and correct the parameter settings if 

necessary (see Chapter 6.4.4 Guide to parameterization menu, Page 6-8). 

16. Tighten the screws on the CLV. 

The CLV is aligned with the bar code. 

4.3.3 Adjusting mode 

The "Adjusting mode" helps you to position the center of the scan line on the object. To do 

so, the CLV masks out one half of the scan line from the center (code position CP = 50 to 

CP = 100). This is irrespective of whether the CLV is operated in Autofocus mode or with 

distance configurations for event-driven dynamic focus control. Fig. 4-9 shows the resulting 

position of the scan line (line scanner). 

Adjusting mode 

Scan line 

CP = 100 

Range masked out 

CP = 50 

CP = 0 

Fig. 4-9: 

Line scanner: scan line in Adjusting mode 


In "Adjusting" mode, the oscillating mirror behaves in the same manner as within the ”Percent 

Evaluation” mode (see Page 4-8, ”Activating Percentage Evaluation mode”). 

1. Activate the operating mode as described in Chapter 6.5.3 Adjusting mode, Page 6-24. 

2. Position the CLV in such a way that the center of the scan line, indicated by the end of 

the scan line (code position CP = 50), is located at the center of the bar code, or at the 

center of the field for all codes if several bar codes are used. 


Chapter 4 

Installation 



Show CP Limits 

The "Show CP Limits" operating mode allows you to test whether the desired effect was produced 

by narrowing the scan line’s active evaluation range. The CLV alternatively hides certain 

parts of the scan line in accordance with the selected min. and max. values of the code 

position. 

For activation of this operating mode and for checking, See Chapter 6.5.5 Show CP-limits, 

Page 6-26. 

4.4 Mounting the external components 

4.4.1 Mounting the AMV/S 60 Connection Module 

1. Mount the AMV/S 60 Connection Module near the CLV. 

The distance between the AMV/S 60 and CLV should not exceed max. 10 m. 

2. Mount the AMV/S 60 in such a way that accessed to the open device is always possible. 

The terminal interface of the CLV is accessed via the internal "Service" plug. 

Detailed information on the mounting and electrical installation procedures is provided in the 

Operating Instructions for the "AMV/S 60 Connection Module" (order no. 8 008 296). 

4.4.2 Mounting the external reading pulse sensor 

If the CLV is triggered by an external reading pulse sensor, the sensor must be mounted in 

the vicinity of the CLV. The "Sensor" switching input is selected as the default trigger source 

for this trigger type. The default debounce time of the input is 30 ms. 

Fig. 4-10 shows two examples of where a photoelectric reflex switch can be mounted. This 

depends on the distance a from the bar code to the front of the object. Depending on the 

application, you may need to mount the sensor in such a way that bar codes on objects of 

different sizes can be read completely during the reading interval. 

Bar code in the center or at the end of the object 

a 

(Top view) 

a 

b 

b < a 

b < a 

b 

Bar code at the start of the object 

aa 

(Top view) 

a 

b 

b < a 

b < a 

b 

Fig. 4-10: 

Line scanner: mounting example for the external reading pulse sensor 




Installation 

1. Mount the reading pulse sensor. 

2. Connect the reading pulse sensor to the "Sensor" switching input of the CLV via the 

AMV/S 60 Connection Module (see Chapter 5.5.7 Connecting the switching inputs, 

Page 5-16). 

3. Connect the CLV to the AMV/S 60 Connection Module and switch on the power supply 

to the module (see Chapter 5.5.3 Connecting the supply voltage, Page 5-13). 

After it has started, the CLV confirms that the self-test was successfull and switches to 

Reading mode ("Device Ready" LED lights up). 

4. Connect the PC to the terminal interface of CLV via a RS 232 data connection cable 

using the internal 9-pin "Service" plug of the AMV/S 60 (see Chapter 5.5.5 Connecting 

the CAN interface, Page 5-15). 


Page 10-43). 

6. From the VIEW menu, choose READING MODE. 

The Terminal Emulator is launched. The CLV is in Reading mode (default: SMART 

decoder). 

Monitor the reading result during each of the subsequent steps! 


In default setting, the CLV deflects the scan line (default setting) about the fixed position 

CW = 50 with a frequency of 1 Hz at a max. angle of ±20° (±40 CW). 

50 CW corresponds to an angle of emergence of 105°. 

7. Move objects with bar codes into the CLV reading field manually under realistic conditions 

and check whether the reading result and trigger pulse are correct. 

8. Repeat the procedure with the conveyor switched on. Check whether the reading 

procedure is synchronized with the objects. 

Parameterizing an external sensor as a trigger source: 

These settings are not required if the CLV is operated with the default configuration. 

1. Choose the DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab. 

2. In the READING TRIGGER MODE section click the option SENSOR INPUT (ACTIVE HIGH). 

3. Download the settings to the CLV by clicking in the toolbar. 



The CLV operates with the "Sensor" switching input as an external trigger source. The 

reading pulse starts when the input is energized (high). 


Chapter 4 

Installation 



4.4.3 Mounting the sensors for detecting the object distance 

If the dynamic focus control function of the CLV is triggered by external sensors, suitable 

sensors must be mounted in the vicinity of the CLV. Fig. 4-11 shows an example of a read 

operation from above. The sensors must be arranged in such a way that all of the potential 

object heights are classified uniquely and overlapping reading ranges occur that can be formed 

with the depths of field of the CLV. A maximum of five switching inputs are available for 

this purpose. A max. of 32 switching states for 8 distance configurations (reading ranges) 

can be implemented using the internal assignment table (combinations). Photoelectric reflex 

switches, for example, can be used to detect the object distance. In the default setting, all 

five "IN 0 ... IN 4" switching inputs are selected for dynamic focus control. 

DC8 

LS7 

h7 

Object distance 


DC2 

DC1 

LS2 

LS1 

h2 

h1 

Fig. 4-11: 

DC = Distance Configuration 

Mounting example for object distance detection 

1. The depths of field of the CLV for the bar code resolution in question is shown in the 

graphs in Chapter 10.2 Specification diagrams, Page 10-1 onwards. Find and note suitable 

focus positions for overlapping reading ranges. 

2. Mount distance sensors (e. g. photoelectric reflex switches) one above the other in a 

row at the mounting location to measure the object distance (see also assignment 

Table5-20, Page5-18). It is advisable to mount these distance sensors opposite the 

direction of motion of the conveyor belt at approx. 100 mm in front of the reading pulse 

sensor. 

3. Connect the distance sensors to the "IN 0 ... IN 4" switching inputs on the CLV via the 

AMV/S 60 Connection Module (see Chapter 5.5.7 Connecting the switching inputs, 

Page 5-16). 

4. Set the focus positions for the required reading ranges on the READING CONFIGURATION 

tab in the "CLV-Setup" program. To do so, click the DISTANCE CONFIGURATION/ASSIGNMENT 

TABLE button and edit the required entries in the dialog box that is then displayed. 

5. As described in Chapter 4.3.2 Adjusting the CLV, Page 4-8, choose the standard decoder 

and start Percentage Evaluation mode temporarily. 

6. Check the reading quality in all distance configurations while the conveyor belt stationary. 

7. Then check the distance detection function in Reading mode under realistic conditions. 

To do so, monitor the reading result in the Terminal Emulator as described in 

Chapter 4.4.2 Mounting the external reading pulse sensor, Page 4-10. 

Default: Focus position F 1 up to F 8 = 1 200 mm. 




Installation 

Note 

The CLV can switch between a maximum of 8 distance ranges for slow search runs using 

the integrated timer or the oscillating mirror reversal points. 

The CLV can be switched between a maximum of 8 distance ranges synchronously to the 

reading process using command strings. 

4.5 Dismantling the device 

1. Switch off the power supply to the AMV/S 60 Connection Module. 

2. Undo the screws for the cable connections on the CLV and disconnect the cables. 

With mounted external parameter memory (optional): 

Undo both screws and remove the cover. 

3. Unscrew the CLV from the mounting device. 

When removing the device from service for the last time, please dispose of it in an 

environmentally-friendly manner, as described in Chapter 7.3 Disposal, Page 7-2. 


Chapter 4 

Installation 



Notes 




Electrical installation 

5 Electrical installation 

CLV Type 

Temperatur 

range 

5.1 Installation sequence 

• Connect the CLV to a SICK Connection Module from the series AMV/S, BMV/BMH 10 

or BMS 20, or using a customer-specific wiring configuration 

• Connect the data and function interfaces of the CLV in the module 

• Connect the PC to the Connection Module (at the terminal interface on the CLV) 

• Connect the power supply to the Connection Module 

5.1.1 SICK Connection Modules (overview) 

Connection 

module 

Purpose 

CLV without heater 0 ... +40 °C AMV 60 – Connecting one CLV 

– Operating voltage 18 ... 30 V DC 

– Enclosure rating IP 30, max. IP 54 

CLV with heater 

– Line scanner 

– Line scanner 

with oscillating 

mirror 

Table 5-1: Connection Modules for the CLV 

AMS 60 

AMV 100 

BMV/BMH 10 

Bus Connection 

Module 

BMS 20 

Interbus-S 

AMV 30-071 

AMV 200 

– Connecting one CLV 

– Operating voltage 230 V AC (115 V)/24 V DC 


– Connecting one CLV 


– Enclosure rating IP 52, 

with connector cover max. IP 65 

– Connecting one CLV to the Profibus-DP, DeviceNet 

or Ethernet 




– Connecting one CLV to the Interbus-S 

– Operating voltage 24 V DC 

– Enclosure rating max. IP 54 

– Connecting two CLVs 







see 

chapter 

AMV 100 – Connecting one CLV 5.2.5 

–35 ... +35 °C – Operating voltage 24 V DC +20%/–10% 

–35 ... +35 °C – Enclosure rating IP 52, 


AMV 200 


– Operating voltage 24 V DC +20%/–10% 



5.2.3 

5.2.3 

5.2.3 

5.2.4 

5.2.4 

5.2.3 

5.2.3 

5.2.3 


Chapter 5 




5.2 Electrical connections and cables 

CLV 

Type 

CLV 

without 

heater 

CLV with 

heater 

Temperature 

range 

The electrical connections on the CLV consist of two 15-pin D Sub HD connections on the 

housing, one plug, and one socket. 

These connections are used to route the following interfaces: 

• Three serial data interfaces (host interface, CAN interface and terminal interface) 

• Six switching inputs (external reading pulse and multifunctional inputs) 

• Four switching outputs (for result status function, for connecting to a PLC for example) 

• CAN bus (for OTS operation) 

• Power supply 

5.2.1 Wire cross-sections 

CLV without heater: 

¾ 

All connections must be wired with copper cables with a minimum wire diameter of 

0.15 mm 2 ! 

CLV with heater: 

¾ 

Connect the power supply terminals (Pin 1/Pin 5) using copper wires with a minimum 

cross-section of 0.75 mm 2 at a maximum length of 10 m! 

5.2.2 Prefabricated cables (overview) 

Connection 

module 

Optional 

cables 

0 ... +40 °C AMV/S 60 2 x No. 2 020 302 or 

1 x No. 2 020 307 

BMV/BMH 10 

Bus Connection 

Module 

AMV 30-071 

BMS 20 

Interbus-S 

Non-Sick Power 

pack 

1 x No. 2 020 307 or 

1 x No. 2 021 298 

2 x No. 2 020 302 or 

1 x No. 2 020 307 

1 x No. 2 020 264 + 

1 x No. 2 020 265 or 

1 x No. 2 020 308 

1 x No. 2 020 303 + 

1 x No. 2 020 264 or 

1 x No. 2 020 981 or 

1 x No. 2 021 267 

– 35 ... +35 °C AMV 100 1 x No. 2 021 298 or 

1 x No. 2 021 689 

AMV 200 

2 x No. 2 021 298 or 

2 x No. 2 021 689 

Non-Sick Power 

pack 

Table 5-2: Cables for connecting the CLV 

Length 

3 m 

3 m 

3 m 

3 m 

3 m 

3 m 

3 m 

3m 

3m 

3 m 

3 m 

3 m 

3 m 

3 m 

3 m 

3 m 

3 m 

Type 

Connecting cable (plug/socket) 

Ext. parameter memory with 2 cables 

(plug/socket) 


(plug/socket) 

Connector cover to connector cover 

Connecting cable (plug/socket) 


(plug/socket) 

Connecting cable with plug/open end 

Connecting cable with plug/socket 


(plug/open end) 

Connecting cable with socket/open end 

Connecting cable with plug/open end 


(open ends) 

Connector cover with 2 cables (open ends) 


Ext. parameter memory to connector cover 


Ext. parameter memory to connector cover 

1 x No. 2 021 267 3 m Connector cover with 2 cables (open ends) 

For technical data on the cables, see Chapter 10.13.4 Cables, external parameter memories 

and plug cover, Page 10-73. 





5.2.3 Connections/cables for the AMV/S Connection Module 

The AMV/S Connection Module is suitable for connecting the CLV to peripherals (distribution 

function) and the power supply. The module can be used to establish a connection to the 

host (point-to-point) or integrate the device in a SICK network or daisy-chain configuration 

(pass-through or master/slave configuration). The module is available in several variants 

(see Table 5-1, Page 5-1). 

Fig. 5-1 shows the connection principle of the AMV/S 60 for one CLV. 

CLV 490 

AMV/AMS 60 

connection module 

PC 

Photoelectric 

switch 

Reading pulse 

Photoelectric 

switch 

Focal position 

Trigger One-Shot 

Conveyor increment 

– – Cable if required (if necessary) 

HOST/PLC 

PLC 

18 ... 30 V DC (AMV 60-011) 

230 V AC 50 Hz (AMS 60-013) 

115 V AC 50/60 Hz (AMS 60-012) 

Fig. 5-1: 

Block diagram: Connection of the CLV to the AMV/S 60 connection module 

Connecting the CLV to the AMV/S 

Two cables no. 2 020 302 are required to connect the CLV to the AMV/S. Alternatively, the 

device can be connected via the external parameter memory no. 2 020 307. 

See Chapter 5.2.5 Connections/cables for the external parameter memory (connection to 

AMV/S or BMV 10/BMS 20), Page 5-4. 

a) CLV without heater: 

Connection modules: AMV/S 60 and AMV 30-071. 

The cables no. 2 020 302 can be extended to 10 m (terminal interface: RS 232!). 


b) CLV with heater: 

Connection modules: AMV 100 and AMV 200. 

The cables no. 2 020 302 must not be extended! 

If longer cables are required, the entire power supply system (Pin 1/Pin 5) must be 

connected with a wire cross-section of at least 0.75 mm 2 with a maximum length of 10 m. 

Use the cable no. 2 021 298 (with two connector covers, length 3 m). 

The procedures for connecting and configuring the AMV/S Connection Modules are 

described in the following documentation: 

• Operating Instructions for the "AMV/S 60 Connection Module" (no. 8 008 296) 

• Operating Instructions for the "AMV 30-071 Connection Module" (no. 8 008 648) 

• Operating Instructions for the "AMV 100/200 Connection Module" (no. 8 008 879) 


Chapter 5 




5.2.4 Connections/cables for the Bus Connection Modules 

BMV 10 and BMS 20 

The BMV 10 Bus Connection Module (depending on the model) is used to connect a CLV 

to the Profibus-DP, DeviceNet, or to the Ethernet for use in industrial applications. 

The BMS 20 Bus Connection Module enables the CLV to be integrated in the Interbus-S. 

Connecting the CLV to the BMV 10/BMS 20 

BMV 10: two cables no. 2 020 302 are required. 

BMS 20: the cables no. 2 020 265 and no. 2 020 264 are required. 

Alternatively, via external parameter memory no. 2 020 307 (see Chapter 5.2.5 Connections/cables 

for the external parameter memory (connection to AMV/S or BMV 10/ 

BMS 20). 


Connection modules: BMV 10 and BMS 20. 

The cables no. 2 020 302 can be extended to 10 m for CLVs without a heater (host and 

terminal interface: RS 232!). 



Connection module: BMV 10. 

The BMV 10 may only be used if it is mounted outside the refrigeration area (temperature 

range 0 ... +40 °C). 

The cables no. 2 020 302 must not be extended. If longer cables are required, the entire 

power supply system (Pin 1/Pin 5) must be connected with a wire cross-section of at least 

0.75 mm 2 at a maximum of 10 m. 

Use the cable no. 2 021 298 (with two connector covers, length 3 m). 

The BMS 20 is not suitable for powering CLVs with heater! 

The procedures for connecting and configuring the Bus Connection Modules are described 

in the following documentation: 

• Operating Instructions for the "BMV/BMH 10 for Profibus DP Bus Connection Module" 

(no. 8 008 825) 

• Operating Instructions for the "BMV/BMH 10 for DeviceNet Connection Module" 

(no. 8 008 972) 

• Operating Instructions for the "BMV/BMH 10 for Ethernet Connection Module" 

(no. 8 009 398) 

• Technical Information for the "BMS 20 for Interbus-S Bus Connection Module" 

(no. 8 007 546) 

5.2.5 Connections/cables for the external parameter memory 

(connection to AMV/S or BMV 10/BMS 20) 

The external parameter memory (external accessory) is located in a connector cover with 

15-pin D Sub HD plug connections. The cover covers the terminals on the CLV so that the 

enclosure rating IP 65 is achieved. 

The connector cover with the external parameter memory is prefabricated with two cables, 

each 3 m in length, and is available with four different cable ends: 

• With two 15-pin D Sub HD connections (pin assignment identical to that of the CLV 

terminals), no. 2 020 307 

• With a connector cover, no. 2 021 689 





• With two open cable ends, no. 2 020 981 

• with one 9-pin D Sub cable connector and one open end, no. 2 020308 

Connecting the CLV with external parameter memory 



Connection Modules: AMV/S 60, AMV 30-071, BMV 10 

¾ 

Cover the terminals on the CLV with the connector cover (parameter memory) 

no. 2 020 307. Connect the plug/socket on the cables ("Host/Term" and " I/O" connections) 

with the appropriate connections on the AMV/S or BMV 10. 

Connection Module: BMS 20. 

¾ 

Cover the terminals on the CLVs with the connector cover (parameter memory) 

no. 2 020 308. Connect the 9-pin plug ("Host/Term" connection) to the socket on the 

BMS 20. Connect the wires of the free cable end ( "I/O" terminal) to the terminal strips 

in the BMS 20. 

Use the external parameter memory no. 2 020 981 (open cable ends) for connecting the 

device to non-Sick Power packs/wiring configurations. 


Connection Module: AMV 100/200 

¾ 

¾ 

AMV 100: Cover the terminals on the CLV with the connector cover (parameter 

memory) no. 2 021 689, labeled "SCANNER". Connect the other connector covers, 

labeled "HOST", to the corresponding connections on the AMV 100. 

AMV 200: see AMV 100, proceed in the same way with the second CLV. 

5.2.6 Connections/cables for the IP 65 connector cover 

(connection to AMV 100/200 or BMV 10) 

The connector cover (optional accessory) with 15-pin D Sub HD plug connections is used 

to cover the terminals on the CLV so that the enclosure rating IP 65 is provided. 

The connector cover is prefabricated with two cables, each of 3 m in length, and is available 

with two different cable ends: 

• With one additional connector cover at the other end (pins assignment identical to that 

of the CLV terminals), no. 2 021 298 

• With two open cable ends, no. 2 021 267 



Both connector cover variants can be used with temperatures up to max. –50 °C if the CLV 

is stationary and the cables are not moved. If the cables are moved due to changes in the 

position of the CLV, the temperature must not drop below max. –40 °C. 

Use the external parameter memory no. 2 020 267 (open cable ends) for connecting the 

device to non-Sick Power packs/wiring configurations. 


Chapter 5 




5.3 Connector pin assignment 

5.3.1 Terminals on the CLV 

Device plug: "Host/Term" connection 

6 1 5 10 Pin Signal Function 

1 1) V S Supply voltage 

2 RxD (RS 232), Terminal Terminal interface (receiver) 

11 15 3 TxD (RS 232), Terminal Terminal interface (transmitter) 

4 Term (RS 422/485) Termination host interface 

5 GND Ground 

6 RD+ (RS 422/485), Host Host interface (receiver+) 

7 RD– (RS 422/485), Host Host interface (receiver–) 

RxD (RS 232), Host 

8 TD+ (RS 422/485), Host Host interface (transmitter+) 

9 TD– (RS 422/485), Host Host interface (transmitter–) 

TxD (RS 232), Host 

10 CAN H CAN Bus (IN/OUT) 

11 Bus RT_485– 

12 Bus RT_485+ 

13 Bus R_485– 

14 Bus R_485+ 

15 CAN L CAN Bus (IN/OUT) 

Housing – Shield 

1) Pin 1 is jumpered with Pin 1 of the "I/O" connection in the CLV 

Table 5-3: Pin assignment of the 15-pin D Sub HD "Host/Term" plug 

Device socket: "I/O" connection 

L 

10 

5 1 6 Pin Signal Function 

15 

11 


2 IN 1 Switching input (trigger for focus control) 

3 Sensor Switching input (external reading pulse) 

4 Result 1 Switching output, variable function 

5 GND Ground 




9 INGND Common ground for all inputs 


11 IN 3 Switching input, variable function 


13 I2C SDA I2C Bus (for external parameter memory) 

14 I2C SCL I2C Bus (for external parameter memory) 



1) Pin 1 is jumpered with Pin 1 of the "Host/Term" connection in the CLV 

Table 5-4: Pin assignment of the 15-pin D Sub HD "I/O" socket 





5.3.2 External parameter memory no. 2 020 307/2 021 689 (optional accessory) 

connector cover no. 2 021 298 (optional accessory) 

Cable plug: "Host/Term" connection 



2 RxD (RS 232), Terminal Terminal interface (receiver) 

11 15 3 TxD (RS 232), Terminal Terminal interface (transmitter) 

4 Term (RS 422/485) Termination host interface 

5 GND Ground 

6 RD+ (RS 422/485), Host Host interface (receiver+) 

7 RD– (RS 422/485), Host Host interface (receiver–) 


8 TD+ (RS 422/485), Host Host interface (transmitter+) 

9 TD– (RS 422/485), Host Host interface (transmitter–) 


10 CAN H CAN bus (IN/OUT) 

11 Bus RT_485– 

12 Bus RT_485+ 

13 Bus R_485– 

14 Bus R_485+ 

15 CAN L CAN bus (IN/OUT) 



Table 5-5: Pin assignment of the 15-pin D Sub HD "Host/Term" cable plug 

Cable socket: "I/O" connection 




15 11 3 Sensor Switching input (external reading pulse) 


5 GND Ground 




9 INGND Common ground for all inputs 




13 I2C SDA I2C Bus (for external parameter memory) 

14 I2C SCL I2C Bus (for external parameter memory) 



1) Pin 1 is jumpered with Pin 1 of the Host/Term connection in the CLV 

Table 5-6: Pin assignment of the 15-pin D Sub HD "I/O" cable socket 


Chapter 5 




5.4 Preparations for electrical installation 

5.4.1 Requirements for the host interface 

The host interface of the CLV can be operated as an RS 422/485 or an RS 232 interface. 

Table 5-7 shows the recommended maximum cable lengths as a function of the selected 

data transfer rate. 

Interface type Transfer rate Distance from host 

RS 232 

Up to 19 200 bit/s Max. 10 m 

38 400...57 600 bit/s Max. 3 m 

¾ 

RS 422/485 1) 

1) with suitable line termination 

To prevent interference, do not lay the cables parallel with power supply and motor 

cables over long distances, e. g. in cable ducts. 

5.4.2 Supply voltage 

Max. 38 400 bit/s 

Max. 57 600 bit/s 

Max. 1 200 m 

Max. 500 m 

Table 5-7: Maximum cable lengths between the CLV and host 

The CLV requires a supply voltage of 18 ... 30 V DC for operation without a heater and 

24 V DC +20 %/–10 % for operation with a heater, to IEC 742 (functional extra-low 

voltage). The power consumption of the individual types is as follows: 

Type Voltage Scanning method Heater Power consumption 1) Connection 

module 

CLV 490-0010/-2010/-6010 18 ... 30 V DC Line scanner No 9 W (typ.)/max. 16 W AMV/S 60 or 

CLV 490-1010/-3010/-7010 18 ... 30 V DC Line scanner with 


No 9 W (typ.)/max. 18 W AMV 30-071 or 

BMV/BMH 10 or 

BMS 20 

CLV 490-0011/-2011/-6011 24 V DC Line scanner Yes 75 W (typ.)/max. 90 W AMV 100/200 

CLV 490-1011/-3011/-7011 +20 %/–10 % Line scanner with Yes 75 W (typ.)/max. 100 W 


1) switching outputs not connected 

Table 5-8: Power consumption of the CLV 

Power-up delay 

The selected device number (default: 1) affects the power-up delay of the device. This is 

useful if a large number of CLVs (e. g. in the SICK network) are to be supplied from one 

power source. Table 5-9 contains a list of the available intervals. 

Device number GN Power-up delay Device number GN Power-up delay 

1; 11; 21; 31 0 ms 6; 16; 26 2 000 ms 

2; 12; 22 400 ms 7; 17; 27 2 400 ms 

3; 13; 23 800 ms 8; 18; 28 2 800 ms 

4; 14; 24 1 200 ms 9; 19; 29 3 200 ms 

5; 15; 25 1 600 ms 10; 20; 30 3 600 ms 

Table 5-9: Power-up delay as a function of the device number GN 

Tip 

The device number can be selected on the DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab in the "CLV-Setup" 

program. 





5.4.3 Non-SICK Power supply unit/connections without the Connection Module 

Power output 

If an non-Sick Power supply unit is used instead of the AMS 60, it must be capable of 

providing the following voltage and power values: 

• For CLV without heater: 18 ... 30 V DC, min. 20 W continuous power output 

• For CLV with heater: 24 V DC +20 %/–10 %, min. 100 W 

The non-Sick Power supply unit must comply with IEC 742 (functional extra-low voltage). 

The output circuit must be reliably electrically isolated from the input circuit pursuant 

to IEC 742 by means of double insulation and a safety isolating transformer. 

Wire cross-section 

The wire cross-section for the power supply (Pin 1/Pin 5) should be at least 0.15 mm 2 , or 

0.75 mm 2 for CLVs with heater, with a max. length of 10 m. 

a) Connecting the CLV without a connector cover/external parameter memory 

The two cables no. 2 020 303 and no. 2 020 264 with open cable end on one side are 

required to connect the CLV. The wire color assignments are shown in Table 5-10 and 

Table5-11, Page5-10. The cables must not be extended for CLVs with heater. 

Connection cable no. 2 020 203 ("Host/Term" connection) 

15-pin D Sub HD socket and open cable end 

Pin Signal Wire color 

1 1) V S Red 

2 RxD (RS 232), Terminal White 

3 TxD (RS 232), Terminal Brown 

4 Term (RS 422/485) Violet 

5 GND Blue 

6 RD+ (RS 422/485), Host Green 

7 RD– (RS 422/485), Host Yellow 


8 TD+ (RS 422/485), Host Grey 

9 TD– (RS 422/485), Host Pink 


10 CAN H – 

11 Bus RT_485– – 

12 Bus RT_485+ – 

13 Bus R_485– – 

14 Bus R_485+ – 

15 CAN L – 

– Shield Orange 


Table 5-10: Wire color assignment of the cable no. 2 020 303 


Chapter 5 




Connection cable no. 2 020 264 ("I/0" connection) 

15-pin D Sub HD plug and open cable end 


1 1) V S Red 

2 IN 1 White 

3 Sensor Brown 

4 Result 1 Violet 

5 GND Blue 

6 IN 0 Green 

7 IN 2 Yellow 

8 Result 2 Grey 

9 INGND Black 

10 Result 3 Grey-pink 

11 IN 3 Red-blue 

12 IN 4 White-green 

13 I2C SDA Brown-green 

14 I2C SCL White-yellow 

15 Result 4 Yellow-brown 



Table 5-11: Wire color assignment of the cable no. 2 020 264 

b) Connecting the CLV with external parameter memory no. 2 020 981 

CLV without heater: 

¾ 

Cover the "Host/Term" and "I/O" connections on the CLV with the connector cover (parameter 

memory) no. 2 020 981. Connect the free cable ends accordingly. The wire 

color assignments are shown in Table 5-12 and Table 5-13. 


Available on request. 





Cable 1 ("Host/Term" connection) 

15-pin D Sub HD socket in the connector cover and open cable end 


1 1) V S Red and pink 

2 RxD (RS 232), Terminal White 

3 TxD (RS 232), Terminal Brown 

4 Term (RS 422/485) Violet 

5 GND Blue and grey-brown 

6 RD+ (RS 422/485), Host Green 

7 RD– (RS 422/485), Host Yellow 


8 TD+ (RS 422/485), Host Grey 

9 TD (RS 422/485), Host Black 


10 CAN H Grey-pink 

11 Bus RT_485– Red-blue 

12 Bus RT_485+ White-green 

13 Bus R_485– Brown-green 

14 Bus R_485+ White-yellow 

15 CAN L Yellow-brown 



Table 5-12: Wire color assignment of cable 1 for external parameter memory no. 2 020 981 

Cable 2 ("I/O" connection) 

15-pin D Sub HD plug in the connector cover and open cable end 


1 1) V S Red and pink 

2 IN 1 White 

3 Sensor Brown 

4 Result 1 Violet 

5 GND Blue and grey-brown 

6 IN 0 Green 

7 IN 2 Yellow 

8 Result 2 Grey 

9 INGND Black 

10 Result 3 Grey-pink 

11 IN 3 Red-blue 

12 IN 4 White-green 

13 I2C SDA – 

14 I2C SCL – 

15 Result 4 Yellow-brown 



Table 5-13: Wire color assignment of cable 2 for external parameter memory no. 2 020 981 


Chapter 5 




c) Connections with connector cover no. 2 021 267 

¾ 

Cover the "Host/Term" and "I/O" connections on the CLV with the connector cover 

no. 2 020 267 and connect the free cable ends accordingly. The wire color assignments 

are shown in Table 5-14 and Table 5-15. 


The connector cover can be used with temperatures up to max. –50 °C if the CLV is stationary 

and the cables are not moved. If the cables are moved due to changes in the position 

of the CLV, the temperature must not drop below max. –40 °C. 

Cable 1 (power supply) 

15-pin D Sub HD socket in the connector cover and open cable end 

Pin Connector cover Signal Wire color 

1 Socket V S Red 

5 Socket GND Black 

Table 5-14: Wire color assignment cable 1 for connector cover no. 2 021 267 

Cable 2 (data and function interfaces) 

15-pin D Sub HD socket/plug in the connector cover and open cable end 

Pin Connector cover Signal Wire color 

2 Plug IN 1 White 

3 Plug Sensor Brown 

4 Plug Result 1 Green 

6 Plug IN 0 Yellow 

7 Plug IN 2 Grey 

8 Plug Result 2 Pink 

9 Plug INGND Blue 

10 Plug Result 3 Red 

11 Plug IN 3 Black 

12 Plug IN 4 Violet 

15 Plug Result 4 Grey-pink 

2 Socket RxD (RS 232), Terminal Red-blue 

3 Socket TxD (RS 232), Terminal White-green 

4 Socket Term (RS 422/485) Brown-green 

6 Socket RD+ (RS 422/485), Host White-yellow 

7 Socket RD– (RS 422/485), Host Yellow-brown 


8 Socket TD+ (RS 422/485), Host White-grey 

9 Socket TD– (RS 422/485), Host Grey-brown 


– – Shield Orange 

Table 5-15: Wire color assignment cable 2 for connector cover no. 2 021 267 





5.5 Electrical installation procedure 

5.5.1 Individual steps 

• Connect the power supply 

• Connect the host interface 

• Connect the PC (connect the terminal interface) 

• Connect the "Sensor" and "IN 0 ... IN 4" switching inputs 

• Connect the "Result 1 ... Result 4" switching outputs 

5.5.2 Tools 

• Tool 

• Digital measuring device (current/voltage measurement) 

5.5.3 Connecting the supply voltage 

a) SICK AMV/S and BMV 10 Connection Modules 

If the CLV is powered via the SICK Connection Modules, the supply voltage does not have 

to be wired separately. 

Connecting the CLV without external parameter memory: 

1. Make sure that the power supply to the Connection Module is switched off. 

2. Connect the "Host/Term" and "I/O" connections on the CLV to the corresponding connections 

on the Connection Module using two cables no. 2 020 302 and secure them 

tightly on both sides. 

Connecting the CLV with external parameter memory: 

1. Mount the connector cover with the external parameter memory no. 2 020 307 on the 

"Host/Term" and "I/O" connections of the CLV and screw it tightly into position. 

2. Connect the two free plug connections on the cables to the corresponding connections 

on the Connection Module and secure them tightly. 

The data and function interfaces of the CLV are connected to the Connection Module. 

b) Power supply via non-SICK Power pack 

Connecting the CLV without external parameter memory: 

1. Connect the cable socket on cable no. 2 020 303 on the "Host/Term" connection and 

screw it tightly into position. 

2. Connect the cable plug on the cable no. 2 020 264 to the "I/O" connection and screw 

it tightly into position. 

3. Connect the power supply to the red wire (Pin 1, V S ) and blue wire (Pin 5, GND) on cable 

no. 2 020 303. See also Table5-10, Page5-9 

Connecting the CLV with external parameter memory: 

1. Connect the "Host/Term" and "I/O" connections on the CLV to the corresponding connections 

on the Connection Module using two cables no. 2 020 981 and secure them 

tightly on both sides. 

2. Connect the power supply to the red/pink wire (Pin 1, VS) and the blue/grey-brown wire 

(Pin 5, GND) of cable 1. See also Table5-12, Page5-11. 

The CLV is connected to the supply voltage. 


Chapter 5 




5.5.4 Connecting the host interface 

AMV 60-011/AMS 60-012, -013 

Terminal assignment 

RS 232 

( )=9-pin Sub D 

plug ( )= 9-pin on PCD-Sub- 

connector at PC 

RS 422 

RS 485: 

CAN-Network: 

Connection diagram for SICK network available on request 

See Operating instructions "Using the CAN interface" 

Fig. 5-2: 

Connecting the host interface 

Risk of damage to the interface module! 

Electrical components in the CLV may be damaged if the host interface is connected 

incorrectly. This also applies when the host interface connections are changed in the 

Connection Modules (configuration). 

¾ Connect the host interface as shown in Fig. 5-2. 

¾ Check the connections carefully before you switch on the CLV. 

1. Connect the host interface on the CLV to the host using shielded cables (EMC requirements). 

Ensure that the maximum cable lengths are not exceeded (see Table 5-7, 

Page 5-8). 

Recommendation 2. Apply the shield on one side. 

Default 

In the default setting, the CLV communicates with the host via the host interface using the 

values shown in Table 5-16. 

Parameter Value 

Physical design RS 422/485 

Data transfer rate 9 600 bit/s 

Data bits 8 

Parity 

None 

Stop bits 1 

Protocol 

SICK (start character: STX, stop character: ETX, no request for repeat: 

none, timeout: 50 ms) 

Table 5-16: Communication parameters for the host interface (default setting) 





For connecting the host interface via the AMV/S 60 Connection Module, see the Operating 

Instructions for the "AMV/S 60 Connection Module" (no. 8 008 296). 

Terminating the RS 422 interface 

The interface can be terminated in the Connection Module. See "Operating Instructions for 

the AMV/S 60, AMV 30.071, AMV 100/200", or "BMS 20 Connection Modules". 

Activating the RS 232 interface: 

Tip 

The RS 232 interface can be activated with the "CLV-Setup" program: 

1. Choose the HOST INTERFACE tab. 

2. Choose the RS 232 option from the HARDWARE drop-down list under DATA FORMAT. 

3. Download the data to the CLV by clicking in the toolbar. 

The DOWNLOAD PARAMETERS dialog box is displayed. 


The CLV uses the RS 232 version of the host interface. 

The communication parameters can be changed, if necessary, on the HOST INTERFACE tab. 

To do so, change the values under DATA FORMAT and INTERFACE PROTOCOL. 

5.5.5 Connecting the CAN interface 

Instructions for the connection and for configuration of the CLV to use the device in the 

SICK-specific CAN Scanner Network or in a CANopen network see the Operating Instructions 

“Application of the CAN interface“ (no. 8 009 180, English edition). 

5.5.6 Connecting the PC 

The CLV is operated and configured with the PC-based "CLV-Setup" program. In order to do 

so, you must connect the device to the PC via the terminal interface (auxiliary interface). Unlike 

the host interface, the terminal interface has a permanent data format and a fixed data 

transfer rate. Fig. 5-3 shows how the terminal interface is connected. The cable length 

should not be more than 10 m. 

AMV 60-011/AMS 60-012, -013 


RS 232 

or 9-pin "Service" 

plug 

( ) = 9-pin Sub D 

plug at PC 

Fig. 5-3: 

Connecting the terminal interface 

1. Switch off the PC and power supply to the SICK Connection Module. 

2. Connect the PC to the internal, 9-pin "Service" plug on the Connection Module using an 

RS 232 connecting cable, e. g. no. 2 014 054 (RxD and TxD crossed). 

– or – 

Without the SICK Connection Module: 

Connect the PC as shown in Fig. 5-3. 

3. Switch on the PC and power supply to the SICK Connection Module. 


Chapter 5 




4. Set the communication parameters (see Chapter 10.6.3 Starting CLV-Setup, 

Page 10-43). 

Tip 

In the default configuration, the terminal interface outputs the reading result in reading 

diagnosis mode. 

You can change the operating mode to MONITOR HOST INTERFACE, to MONITOR HOST INTERFACE 2 

or AUXILIARY INPUT on the AUXILARY INTERFACE tab in the "CLV-Setup" program. 

5.5.7 Connecting the switching inputs 

"Sensor" switching input 

If a reading procedure is to be triggered on the CLV by an external sensor, the reading pulse 

sensor must be connected to the "Sensor" switching input. This trigger type is selected in 

the default setting of the CLV. Fig. 5-4 shows the connections for the "Sensor" switching input. 

Table 5-17 contains the characteristic data for this input. 

PNP sensor 

Switch 

AMV 60-011/ 

AMS 60-012, -013 


V S 

V S 

2k6 

Sensor 

1 

3 

V S 

OUT 

V S 

1 

3 

V S / 24 V 

SENSOR 

T. 27 

T. 19 

CLV 

IN GND 

GND 

9 

5 

GND 

GND 

9 

5 

(IN) GND 

GND 

T. 20 

T. 36 

V S = +18 ... +30 V DC for CLV without heater, 24 V DC +20 % /–10 % for CLV with heater 

Fig. 5-4: 

Connections of the "Sensor" switching input 

¾ Connect the reading pulse sensor as shown in Fig. 5-4. 

Switching mode 

Current at the input starts the reading interval on the CLV. 

(default: active high, debouncing: max. 30 ms (standard)) 

Properties – optodecoupled, non-interchangeable 

– can be connected to PNP output on a sensor 

Electrical values Low: –30 V ≤ V I ≤ +2 V High: +7 V ≤ V I ≤ +13 V 

Table 5-17: Characteristic data of the "Sensor" switching input 

Tip 

You can change the switching mode (polarity, debouncing, response for first pulse after power-up) 

of the "SENSOR" switching input on the DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab in the "CLV-Setup" 

program. 

¾ 

Click the EDIT READING TRIGGER button. 

Enter the values in the dialog box displayed. 



Note 

An external pulse is not required for Percentage Evaluation mode. 





"IN 0 ... IN 4" switching inputs 

If the Autofocus function is not used and the CLVs dynamic focus control function is to be 

triggered by external sensors, the sensors are connected to the five inputs "IN 0 ... IN 4". 

Together with the internal assignment table, these can be used to configure a maximum of 

32 switching states for up to 8 distance configurations. The dynamic focus control function 

is selected for all inputs by default. 

Additional function "IN 3": 

The "IN 3" input can also be used as a trigger source for the One-Shot function of the oscillating 

mirror. 

Additional function "IN 4": 

The input "IN 4" can also be used as a trigger source for the One-Shot function of the 

oscillating mirror or as an input for a belt increment signal. In this case, a maximum of 

16 switching statuses can be used for dynamic focus control. 

Fig. 5-5 shows the connections for the "IN 0 ... IN 4" switching inputs. Table 5-18 shows the 

pin assignment on the CLV and the terminal assignment in the AMV/S 60. Table 5-19, 

Page 5-18 contains the characteristic data for these inputs. Table5-20, Page5-18 shows 

the input combinations based on the distance configurations. The interaction of the switching 

input functions is shown in Table5-21, Page5-19 

PNP sensor 

Switch 

AMV 60-011 

AMS 60-012, -013 


V S 

V S 

2k6 

IN X 

1 

Y 

V S 

OUT 

V S 

1 

Y 

V S / 24 V 

IN X 

T. 28 

Z 

CLV 

IN GND 

GND 

9 

5 

GND 

GND 

9 

5 

(IN) GND 

GND 

T. 20 

T. 37 

V S = +18 ... +30 V DC for CLV without heater, 24 V DC +20 % /–10 % for CLV with heater 

Pin and terminal assignment 

for IN X see Table 5-18 

Fig. 5-5: 

Connections of the "IN 0 ... IN 4" switching inputs 

Input 

"IN X" 

CLV "I/O" connection 

Pin Y 

AMV/S 60 

Terminal Z 

IN 0 Pin 6 T. 22 

IN 1 Pin 2 T. 23 

IN 2 Pin 7 T. 24 

IN 3 Pin 11 T. 25 

IN 4 Pin 12 T. 26 

Table 5-18: Pin and terminal assignment for "IN 0 ... IN 4" switching inputs 

¾ Connect the sensors as shown in Fig. 5-5. 




Chapter 5 




Function 

Trigger source for dynamic focus control 

"IN 3" alternative: – trigger source for One Shot on oscillating mirror 

"IN 4" alternative: – trigger source for One Shot on oscillating mirror 

– belt increment input 

Default setting "IN 3" and "IN 4": dynamic focus control 

Switching mode Active when input energized (high) 

Properties 

– Optodecoupled, non-interchangeable 

– Can be connected to PNP output on a sensor 

Electrical values Low: –30 V ≤ V I ≤ +2 V High: +7 V ≤ V I ≤ +13 V 

Table 5-19: Characteristic data of the "IN 0 ... N 4" switching inputs 

Switching inputs Content Assignment Table Distance Config. 2) 

Logic state 1) 

"IN 4 ... IN 0" 

inputs 

Assignment 

table index 

Default setting 

0 0 0 0 0 N 1 DC 1 DC 6 

0 0 0 0 1 N 2 DC 2 DC 5 

0 0 0 1 0 N 3 DC 3 DC 4 

0 0 0 1 1 N 4 DC 4 DC 4 

0 0 1 0 0 N 5 DC 5 DC 3 

0 0 1 0 1 N 6 DC 6 DC 3 

0 0 1 1 0 N 7 DC 7 DC 3 

0 0 1 1 1 N 8 DC 8 DC 3 

0 1 0 0 0 N 9 DC 8 DC 2 

0 1 0 0 1 N 10 DC 8 DC 2 

0 1 0 1 0 N 11 DC 8 DC 2 

0 1 0 1 1 N 12 DC 8 DC 2 

0 1 1 0 0 N 13 DC 8 DC 2 

0 1 1 0 1 N 14 DC 8 DC 2 

0 1 1 1 0 N 15 DC 8 DC 2 

0 1 1 1 1 N 16 DC 8 DC 2 

1 0 0 0 0 N 17 DC 8 DC 1 

1 0 0 0 1 N 18 DC 8 DC 1 

1 0 0 1 0 N 19 DC 8 DC 1 

1 0 0 1 1 N 20 DC 8 DC 1 

1 0 1 0 0 N 21 DC 8 DC 1 

1 0 1 0 1 N 22 DC 8 DC 1 

1 0 1 1 0 N 23 DC 8 DC 1 

1 0 1 1 1 N 24 DC 8 DC 1 

1 1 0 0 0 N 25 DC 8 DC 1 

1 1 0 0 1 N 26 DC 8 DC 1 

1 1 0 1 0 N 27 DC 8 DC 1 

1 1 0 1 1 N 28 DC 8 DC 1 

1 1 1 0 0 N 29 DC 8 DC 1 

1 1 1 0 1 N 30 DC 8 DC 1 

1 1 1 1 0 N 31 DC 8 DC 1 

1 1 1 1 1 N 32 DC 8 DC 1 

1) 1 = energized (active); 0 = deenergized (inactive) 

2) Distance configuration (DC): data record for focus position 

Example: 

Photoelectric switches 

(bright switching) 

Table 5-20: Dynamic focus control: switching inputs/distance configuration assignment table 





Parameter settings of switching inputs 

Effects 

"IN 3" "IN 4" 

Focus control 1) Focus control 1) "IN 3" switches the focus position in combination with "IN 0 ... IN 2" and "IN 4" 

Focus control 1) One shot "IN 4" triggers the one shot 

"IN 3" switches the focus position in combination with "IN 0 ... IN 2" 

Focus control 1) Increment 

counter 

"IN 4" receives increment signals 

"IN 3" switches the focus position in combination with "IN 0 ... IN 2" 

One shot Focus control 1) "IN 3" triggers the one shot 

"IN 0 ... IN 2" switch the focus position 

"IN 4" has no effect 

One shot One shot "IN 4" triggers the one shot 


"IN 3" has no effect 

One shot 

1) depending on the assignment table 

Increment 

counter 

"IN 3" triggers the one shot 

"IN 4" receives increment signals 


Table 5-21: Combination of the functions of the "IN 0 ... IN 4" switching inputs 

Tip 

The function assigned to the "IN 3" and "IN 4" input can be modified on the DEVICE CONFI- 

GURATION tab in the "CLV-Setup" program. 

¾ 

Click the FUNCTION IN 3 and FUNCTION IN 4 drop-down list and choose the required 

function. 

5.5.8 Connecting the "Result 1 Result 4" switching outputs 

The four switching outputs can be assigned different functions for outputting result statuses 

independently of each other. If the assigned event occurs during the reading procedure, the 

corresponding switching output becomes live at the end of the reading pulse for the selected 

pulse duration. The pulse duration can be set individually for each output. 

The "Read Result" LED is linked to the "Result 2" output and lights up in Reading mode for the 

selected pulse duration and function of the result status display (default: Good Read, 100 ms). 

Fig. 5-6, Page 5-20 shows the connections for the "Result 1 ... Result 4" switching outputs. 

Table5-22, Page5-20 shows the pin assignment on the CLV and the terminal assignment 

in the AMV/S 60. Table5-23, Page5-20 contains the characteristic data for these outputs. 

The four outputs have the same characteristic data. 


Chapter 5 




Fuse 

V S 

Logic 

Result X Y 

Temperature 

sensor GND 5 

R L 

AMV 60-011/ 

AMS 60-012, -013 


Result X 

GND 

Z 

T.35 

Pulse duration 

depending 

on setting: 

– 10 ms ... 900 ms 

– 100 ms ... 9 900 ms 

– 00: static 

(to the end of next 

reading pulse) 

V S = +18 ... +30 V DC for CLV without heater, 

24 V DC +20 %/–10 % for CLV with heater 

Pin and terminal assignment 

for "Result X" see Table 5-22 

Fig. 5-6: 

Connections of the "Result 1 ... Result 4" switching outputs 

Output 

"Result X" 

CLV "I/O" connection 

Pin Y 

AMV/S 60 

Terminal Z 

Result 1 Pin 4 T. 31 




Table 5-22: Pin and terminal assignment for "Result 1 ... Result 4" switching outputs 

¾ Connect the outputs as shown in Fig. 5-6. 

" 

Switching mode 

Properties 

Function 

assignment 

(default) 

PNP-switching with respect to the supply voltage V S 

The current in the event of a short-circuit is limited to 0.7 A 

"Result 1": Device Ready (static), polarity: not inverted 

"Result 2": Good Ready, polarity: not inverted 

"Result 3": No Ready, polarity: not inverted 

"Result 4": Match 1, polarity: not inverted 

Pulse duration: 100 ms 

Electrical values 0 V ≤ V O ≤ 30 V Guaranteed: V O ≤ V S ≤ 1.3 V with I 0 ≤ 100 mA 

I 0 ≤ 100 mA 

Table 5-23: Characteristic data of the "Result 1 ... Result 4" switching outputs 

Note 

If the "Device Ready" function is chosen, the CLV outputs a static pulse in Reading mode. 



Tip 

The output function, pulse duration (timer), and polarity of the signals can be changed on 

the DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab in the "CLV-Setup" program. 

¾ Click the EDIT RESULT OUTPUTS button and enter the values in the dialog box displayed. 

Recommendation ¾ To check the switching functions using a high-impedance digital voltmeter, connect a 

load to the outputs to prevent incorrect voltage values/switching statuses from being 

displayed. 




Operation 

6 Operation 

6.1 Overview of steps for starting up the CLV 

• Start up the CLV with the factory default settings (quick start). 

With this configuration, the CLV can be operated without being connected to a PC (this 

is, however, not the case the first time the CLV with external parameter memory is switched 

on). 

• Connect the PC (see Chapter 5.5.5 Connecting the CAN interface, Page 5-15) and install 

the "CLV-Setup" program (see Chapter 10.6 Installing and operating the "CLV-Setup" 

program, Page 10-41). 

• Configure (parameterize) the CLV for the desired application with CLV-Setup or command 

strings. 

6.2 Default settings 

Table 6-1 and Table 6-2, Page 6-2 contain an overview of the factory default settings for 

the CLV. The default parameters are such that the CLV can be put into operation either 

straight away or following a few minor adjustments. A PC does not need to be connected to 

start up the CLV with the default settings (this is, however, not the case the first time the CLV 

with external parameter memory is switched on). 

The default settings are stored permanently both in the ROM of the CLV and in the CLV- 

Setup database. They can be loaded to the RAM of the CLV at any time and displayed in the 

tabs of the "CLV-Setup" program. 

Displaying and printing out a complete set of default settings in CLV-Setup 

1. To save the current settings in the parameter set: 

Choose FILE and SAVE AS, and enter a file name in the dialog box that appears. CLV- 

Setup saves the current settings in a configuration file with the extension "*.scl". 

2. Click in the toolbar. 

CLV-Setup loads the default settings from its internal database and displays them in the 

tabs. 


The PRINT FILE dialog box is displayed. 

4. If desired, a comment can be entered in the input field for the header of the printout. 

Confirm the entry with OK. The PRINT dialog box for configuring the printer then is 

displayed. 

5. Make the appropriate entries in the dialog box and confirm these with OK. 

CLV-Setup prints out the complete set of default settings in the form of a table. The header 

contains the company and user names that were entered during the CLV-Setup installation 

routine. 


Chapter 6 

Operation 



6.2.1 Default settings of the line scanner CLV 490 (all variants) 

Parameter 


Decoder 

SMART/standard 

Active codes types Code 39, 2/5 Interleaved, Code 128 

Code length 

Freely assignable (2/5 Interleaved: interval 4 ... 50 characters) 

Start/stop ratio 

Automatic 

Min./max. code position 5/ 95 CP 

No. of multiple reads 3 

Min./max. no. codes 1 

Scanning frequency 

800 Hz 

Distance measurement Active 

Autofocus mode 

Min. distance 

Range 

400 ... 2 200 mm 

Scan angle –27°... +27° 

Focus control trigger Autofocus, switchover immediately (synchronously) 

Reading pulse source 

Start: "Sensor" switching input (active: high); end: "Sensor" switching input 

"IN 0... IN 4" switching inputs Focus position changeover (without meaning for autofocus function) 

"Sensor" switching input Start and end of reading pulse (level: active high), debouncing 20 ... 30 ms 

Switching outputs 

Not inverted; pulse duration: 100 ms 

Status output function Result 1: Device Ready (static); Result 2: Good Read; Result 3: No Read; Result 4: Match 1 

CLV arrangement 

Stand-alone 

Read result output 

Host interface 

Device number 1 

Start option 

Load the parameter set of the external parameter memory 

Host interface (type) RS 422/485 

Protocol 

NAK; start character: STX, stop character: ETX 

Transmission rate 

9 600 bit/s 

Data format 

8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit 

Output format 

Header: blank, Separator: ST, Terminator: CR LF; Error string: separator only 

Output sorting 

In accordance with code position 

Output time Read result: end of the read interval Separator: after code 

Test string 

Not activated 

Terminal interface 

RS 232, 9 600 bit/s, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit (values cannot be changed) 

Function 

Reading diagnosis 

Table 6-1: Extract: Default parameter settings of the line scanner CLV 490-0010/-0011 

6.2.2 Default settings of the line scanner with oscillating mirror 

CLV 490 (all variants) 

Default settings as for line scanner CLV 490, but with the following additional parameters: 

Parameter 


Oscillating amplitude ±40 CW (corresponds to an angle of deflection of –20° ... +20°) 

Operating mode 

Oscillating with fixed amplitude, mode independent of reading pulse trigger 

Oscillating frequency 

1 Hz 

Fixed position 50 CW (corresponds to an angle of deflection of 105°) 

Table 6-2: Extract: Default parameter settings of the line scanner with oscillating mirror CLV 490 




Operation 

6.3 Quick start 

A PC does not need to be connected when the CLV is operated with the factory default 

settings (this is, however, not the case the first time the CLV with external parameter 

memory is switched on, see Chapter 6.3.2 Switching the CLV with external parameter memory 

connected on for the first time with the factory default settings, Page 6-4). 

6.3.1 Switching the CLV on for the first time with the factory default settings 

1. Connect the CLV to the AMV/S 60 Connection Module using the two cables no. 2 020 302. 

2. Connect the reading pulse sensor (e. g. photoelectric reflex switch) to the "Sensor" 

switching input of the CLV via the AMV/S 60 (see Chapter 5.5.7 Connecting the 

switching inputs, Page 5-16). 

3. Switch on the power supply of the AMV/S 60. 

The CLV starts. The "Device Ready" LED lights up. The "Result 1" ("Device Ready") 

output switches. 


If an external parameter memory is connected to the CLV, the "Device Ready" LED 

blinks for 10 s when the device starts up correctly and then lights up constantly. If the 

"Device Ready" and "Read Result" LEDs both blink constantly, the memory is empty 

and the CLV is not ready for operation. 

In this case, proceed as described in Chapter 6.3.2 Switching the CLV with external parameter 

memory connected on for the first time with the factory default settings, 

Page 6-4. 



a frequency of 1 Hz and an oscillating amplitude of ±20° (±40 CW). 50 CW correspond 

to a deflection angle below 105°. 

4. Start the reading pulse: block the light path of the photoelectric switch or close the 

switch. The "Laser On" LED lights up. The CLV switches the laser diode on and the scan 

line appears. 

5. Present the bar code pattern (Fig. 6-1) to the CLV at the reading distance specified in 

Table 6-3, Page 6-4. 

6. Align the bar code in such a way that the red scan line is almost at a 90 angle to the 

bars (line scanner) or that the red scan line sweeps the bars at a 90 angle when it is 

deflected (oscillating mirror). 

7. End the reading pulse: unblock the light path of the photoelectric switch or open the 

switch. The "Laser On" LED is extinguished. The CLV switches the laser diode off. The 

CLV confirms that the bar code was read successfully (the "Read Result" LED lights up 

for 100 ms). The "Result 2" ("Good Read") output is switched for a duration of 100 ms. 

The CLV can now be operated with the factory default settings. The device can be switched 

off without the configuration data being lost as no changes have been made to the parameter 

set. 

0 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 

Fig. 6-1: Bar code pattern (Code 39; module width 0.35 mm; Print ratio 2:1) 


Chapter 6 

Operation 



Device type Scanning method Reading distance 

CLV 490 (all variants) Line scanner approx. 1 000 mm 

CLV 490 (all variants) Line scanner with oscillating mirror approx. 1 000 mm 

Table 6-3: Reading distances for default settings 

6.3.2 Switching the CLV with external parameter memory connected on for the 

first time with the factory default settings 

1. Connect the CLV to the SICK AMV/S 60 Connection Module via the external parameter 

memory no. 2 020 307 using the two cables. 

2. Connect the reading pulse sensor (e. g. photoelectric reflex switch) to the "Sensor" switching 

input of the CLV via the AMV/S 60 (see Chapter 5.5.7 Connecting the switching 

inputs, Page 5-16). 

3. Switch on the power supply of the AMV/S 60. 

The CLV starts. In the default setting, the start option is set to START WITH EXTERNAL PARA- 

METERS. 

Once the CLV has started, the "Device Ready" and "Read Result" LEDs blink continuously. 

This indicates that the CLV was able to address the external parameter memory 

but the memory is empty (default state). 

The CLV is then initialized with its internal parameter set but does not output data on its 

host interface. The CLV is not ready for operation! 



a frequency of 1 Hz and an oscillating amplitude of ±20° (±40 CW). 50 CW corresponding 

to a deflection angle below 105°. 

4. Connect the PC to the terminal interface of the CLV. To do so, connect the RS 232 data 

connection cable (e. g. no. 2 014 054) to the "Service" plug in the AMV/S 60 (see 

Chapter 5.5.5 Connecting the CAN interface, Page 5-15). 


Page 10-43). 

CLV-Setup attempts by default to communicate with the CLV via COM 1. If the communication 

parameters match, "CLV-Setup" uploads the current parameter set from the 

RAM of the CLV to the internal database and displays the values in the tabs (the parameter 

set contains the factory default settings when the scanner is switched on for the 

first time). If necessary, choose "CLV 490" in the DEVICE drop-down list in the top righthand 

corner in order to initiate communication and the upload manually. 

6. Choose the DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab. 

7. Click the COPY INTERN Ö EXTERN field in the START WITH box. 

CLV-Setup then instructs the CLV to copy the internal parameter set to the external parameter 

memory the next time it starts. 

8. Carry out a download to the CLV by clicking in the toolbar. 

CLV-Setup copies the parameter set with the new start option by downloading it to the 

CLV. The DOWNLOAD PARAMETERS dialog box is then displayed. 

9. Confirm the dialog box by choosing the PERMANENT storage option. 

10. Disconnect the AMV/S 60 briefly from the power supply to restart the CLV. 

Once the CLV has started, the "Device Ready" and "Read Result" LEDs blink alternately 

for approx. 10 s before the "Device Ready" LED lights up constantly. 

The "Result 1" ("Device Ready") output switches. 

The CLV has copied the parameter set to the external parameter memory and reset the 

start option automatically to START WITH EXTERNAL PARAMETERS. 




Operation 

The CLV and external parameter memory are then ready for operation with the factory 

settings. The next time the device is started, the "Device Ready" LED blinks for approx. 

10 s and then lights up constantly. 

Continue the quick start as of Step 4 in Chapter 6.3.1 Switching the CLV on for the first time 

with the factory default settings, Page 6-3. 

6.4 Configuring (parameterization) the CLV 

The CLV adapts to the reading situation locally with the configuration. The read, evaluation 

and output characteristics can, therefore, be parameterized as required on the basis of the 

factory default settings or an application-specific CLV parameter set that has already been 

created. 

The CLV supports two different configuration methods: 

• Configuration via the "CLV-Setup" program 

(parameter values are set via the serial interface) 

• Configuration via command strings 

(parameter values are set via the serial interface). 

See Chapter 10.7 Configuring a CLV with command strings, Page 10-49. 

In the Parameterization mode, the CLV outputs no reading result. 

6.4.1 Configuring the CLV via the user interface of CLV-Setup 

To be able to use CLV-Setup, a PC has to be connected and the program installed on it. The 

procedure for connecting the PC to the CLV is described in Chapter 5.5.5 Connecting the 

CAN interface, Page 5-15. The procedures for installing and starting the "CLV-Setup" program 

and for starting and operating the user interface are described in the Appendix 

(Chapter 10.6 Installing and operating the "CLV-Setup" program, Page 10-41). 

Transferring a parameter set between CLV-Setup and the CLV 

When the CLV is being parameterized, CLV-Setup runs in the offline mode. To be able to 

modify the current parameter set of the CLV, this first has to be loaded to CLV-Setup from 

the CLV. This procedure is referred to as an upload ("upload from CLV") during which CLV- 

Setup always loads a complete copy of the current CLV parameter set. This parameter set 

remains unchanged until it is overwritten by CLV-Setup. With the help of the context menu 

(right mouse button), only the parameter just edited can be loaded ("upload parameter") 

from the CLV’s memory (RAM). 

Changes made to the current parameter set in CLV-Setup do not take effect until the parameter 

set has been transferred to the CLV. CLV-Setup always sends a copy of the complete 

parameter set to the CLV, i. e. all of the existing parameter values in the CLV are overwritten. 

The procedure for transferring and saving the parameter values in the CLV is referred to as 

a download ("download to CLV"). With the help of the context menu (right mouse button), 

only the parameter just edited will be temporarily loaded ("download parameter") into the 

CLV’s memory (RAM). 

Loading a complete CLV parameter set (upload) 

¾ Click in the toolbar. 

CLV-Setup loads the current CLV parameter set from the RAM of the CLV to its database 

and displays the values in the tabs. 

The "Device Ready" LED is extinguished during the upload. 

If the "CLV-Setup" program does not recognize parameters transferred during the upload, it 

outputs a warning message. Unknown parameters can be edited in the EXTRAS tab by 


Chapter 6 

Operation 



following the conventions for command strings. When the parameter set is then saved, these 

parameters are also saved. 

Transferring and saving a complete CLV parameter set (download) 


The "Device Ready" LED is extinguished. 

CLV-Setup copies the parameter set to the RAM of the CLV. The DOWNLOAD PARAMETERS 

dialog box with the storage options is then displayed. 

PERMANENT: CLV-Setup copies the parameter record to the RAM and to the EEPROM of 

the CLV. 

TEMPORARY: CLV-Setup copies the parameter record to the RAM only. The changes are 

lost when the CLV supply voltage is switched off. 

2. Confirm the dialog box with the desired storage option. 

The "Device Ready" LED lights up again. 

The new parameter set is stored in the CLV either permanently or temporarily. 

CLV with external parameter memory 

If the parameter set was downloaded and stored permanently, CLV-Setup opens a further 

dialog box for adjusting the parameter set in the external memory, if the start option is set 

to START WITH EXTERNAL PARAMETERS. 

¾ 

Choose the COPY NOW INTERNAL PARAMETER SET TO EXTERNAL MEMORY option. 

CLV-Setup then instructs the CLV to copy the new parameter set to the external 

memory. The "Device Ready" LED lights up again. 

The internal and external parameter sets are now identical. 

See also Chapter 10.3.5 Adjusting the parameter set in the external parameter memory after 

it has been downloaded to the CLV, Page 10-36. 

Saving a parameter set in CLV-Setup 

1. To save the modified parameter set as a new configuration file in CLV-Setup, or to overwrite 

an existing file, choose FILE and SAVE AS. 

The CLV FILE SELECTOR dialog box is then displayed. 

2. Enter the file name in the dialog box (file name extension "*.scl") and confirm the entry. 

The new parameter set is now stored in CLV-Setup in the subdirectory "data". 

6.4.2 Function of the tabs in CLV-Setup (overview) 

Reading Configuration 

This tab and further dialog boxes are used to set the following: 

• Scanning frequency 

• Start/stop ratio 

• Autofocus mode (distance measurement, preference focus distance, delay of focus 

change, depth of field optimization, autofocus space, delimitations, extent of deflection) 

• Reading distance configuration for event-controlled focus control (focus position, 

evaluation range of the scan line, assignment table) 

• Trigger source for the focus control (if event-controlled) 

• Adjustment to bar code quality caracteristics and relative module width 




Operation 

Device Configuration 


• Device number 

• Source of the Reading trigger mode 

• Laser timeout 

• Output time of the Reading result referred to the start of the reading interval 

• Scanner position parameters (the position of the CLV in the area) 

• Tracking parameters 

• Object polling parameters 

• Output filter of the reading result (host interface) 

• Physical arrangement for data output via the host interface 

(stand-alone, master/slave) 

• Functional assignment of the IN 3 and "IN 4" switching inputs 

• Functional assignments of the "Result 1 ... Result 4" switching outputs 

• Start option for accessing the parameter set 

• Code position comparison 


Code Configuration 


• Type of active decoder (SMART or standard decoder) 

• Evaluation routines for individual code types 

• Number of identical reads (multiple reads) 

• Minimum and maximum number of bar codes to be read/output 

• Kind of Start/Stop recognition 

• Activation of the comparison of the code position for the separation of identical bar codes 

To enhance the reading reliability with fast applications, only activate those code types 

and code lengths that are actually relevant. 

Host Interface 


• Destination of the read result date strings (host interface or CAN interface) 

• Active physical interface (RS 422/485 or RS 232) 

• Data format and transmission rate 

• Data transmission protocol 

• Start and stop characters of the interface protocol 

Data Strings 


• Data output format of the host interface (telegram format) 

• Constants and reading diagnosis data in the header, separator and terminator 

• Arrangement of the separators in the data string 

• Output format for no reads and contents of the error string 

• Test string function 

• Output sequence and sort criteria for reading more than one bar code per reading pulse 

• Format mask and its structure 


Chapter 6 

Operation 



Auxiliary Interface 

This tab and further dialog boxes are used to change the following: 

• Operating mode of the terminal interface 

CAN Interface 

This tab and the further dialog windows are used to change the following: 

• CAN interface operating mode 

• Data transfer rate 

• Type of logical data connection of the connected CLV 

• Usage of the switch inputs/outputs of the CLV as CANopen Digital I/O 

Oscillating Mirror 

This tab is used to set the following: 

• Operating mode of the oscillating mirror 

• Oscillating frequency 

• Angle of deflection (oscillating amplitude) 

• Start of oscillating mode 

• Trigger source for One-Shot 

Extras 

This tab is used to edit parameters that were not recognized by CLV-Setup after an upload. 

Note 

CLV-Setup Online Help contains a detailed description of the functions of the parameters and 

their valid entries (see Chapter 10.6.6 CLV-Setup Help, Page 10-46 for calling up Help). 

6.4.3 Parameterizing example 

For a simple application,Chapter 10.10 Discussion of a parameterization example, 

Page 10-56 in the appendix shows an example of the recommended procedure when parameterizing 

the CLV. Otherwise, the general guidelines in the next chapter provide orientation 

during adaptation to the individual reading situation. 

6.4.4 Guide to parameterization menu 

Overview of parameterization steps 

• Adjusting the optical read properties of the scanner 

• Configuring a read pulse timing 

• Adjusting the decoder’s evaluation properties 

• Adjusting the output properties (data, result status) 

• Specifying the terminal interface function (auxiliary interface) 

• Indicating the source of the parameter set for starting up (only with external parameter 

memory) 




Operation 

When the CLV is switched on for the first time, it is started with the factory default settings. 

The following parameters must then be set: 

a) Adjusting the optical reading properties 

• Scanning frequency Ö READING CONFIGURATION tab Ö Reading Parameters 

• Blank zone Ö READING CONFIGURATION tab Ö Start/stop ratio 

• Poor quality bar code print Ö READING CONFIGURATION tab Ö Code label characteristics 

• Relative modul width Ö READING CONFIGURATION tab Ö Code label characteristics 

Parameterizing the autofocus mode (Part 1): 

Action Line scanner Line scanner with oscillating mirror 

1. Activate autofocus mode Ö READING CONFIGURATION tab 

FOCUS TRIGGER SOURCE 

Ö Autofocus 

2. Choose autofocus mode AUTOFOCUS Ö MODE 

– Minimum distance or 

– Differential background or 

– Differential background and tracking 

see Table 6-5, Page 6-10 

3. Configure CLV for distance 

measurement 

(define visible range) 

AUTOFOCUS Ö EDIT READING FIELD 

– Minimum Code Position CP 

– Maximum Code Position CP 

4. Set up autofocus mode AUTOFOCUS Ö EDIT AUTO FOCUS 

Ö ADJUSTMENTS 

– Preference focus distance 

– Focus relase 

Ö LIMITS 

– Auto focus limitation 

– Scan angle limitation 

– Auto focus space, 


Ö OPTIMIZATIONS 

– Delay of focus change 

– Depth of field optimization 

– Object height passing in OTS mode 

– Distance measurement Ö ACTIVE 

– Source of distance information 

5. Choose time of focusing 

(based on reading pulse) 


Ö Inputs/Serial/Autofocus 

– Immediate or Synchronous 

– Latched 

Table 6-4: Guide: Parameterizing autofocus mode (Part 1) 

Ö READING CONFIGURATION tab 


Ö •Autofocus 

AUTOFOCUS Ö MODE 

– Minimum distance or 

– Differential background or 

– Differential background and tracking 


AUTOFOCUS Ö EDIT READING FIELD 



– Oscillating mirror amplitude CW 

AUTOFOCUS Ö EDIT AUTO FOCUS 

Ö ADJUSTMENTS 

– Prefereence focus distance 

– Focus relase 

Ö LIMITS 

– Auto focus limitation 

– Scan angle limitation 

– Oscillating angle limitation 

– Auto focus space, 


Ö OPTIMIZATIONS 


– Depth of field optimization 

– Object height passing in OTS mode 

– Distance measurement Ö ACTIVE 

– Source of distance information 




– Latched 

Note 

The minimum and maximum values for the active evaluation range of the scan line (MIN. AND 

MAX. CODE POSITION) can be checked in the SHOW CP-LIMITS mode. 

See Chapter 6.5.5 Show CP-limits, Page 6-26. 


Chapter 6 

Operation 



Parameterization autofocus function (Part 2): 

• Area parameters Ö tab DEVICE CONFIGURATION ÖEdit Scanner position and Edit Tracking 

Parameters (in OTS mode only) 

• Teach-in/show ambient background Ö TOOL menu Ö Device functions 

Parameter Minimum Distance Differential background Differential background 

and Tracking 

Condition 

1 object in reading field per 

reading interval 

1 object in reading field per 

reading interval 

1. Limits: 

✖ ❍ ❍ 

autofocus limitation 

2. Limits: 

✖ ❍ ❍ 

Scan angle limitation 

3. Limits: 

✖ ✖ ✖ 

oscillation angle limitation 1) 

4. Limits: 

autofocus space 

– ❍ ❍ 

5. Edit scanner position 

(angles): 

angle alpha, beta, gamma 

6. Edit scanner position 

(coordinates): 

Coordinates x, y, z 

7. Edit tracking parameter: 

focus release point 

– ✖ ✖ 

– ✖ ✖ 

– – ✖ 

8. Teach-in background – ❍ ❍ 

✖ : required ❍: optional 1) for line scanners with oscillating mirror 

Table 6-5: Guide: Parameterizing the autofocus function (Part 2) 

No. of objects in the reading 

field per reading interval: ≥ 1 

Fig. 6-2 shows a 2D example of how the visible range of the CLV is adjusted using the 

parameters "Limit values: scan angle limitation" and "Limit value: autofocus space". 

Scan angle 

limitation 

Autofocus space 

Fig. 6-2: 

Narrowing the visible range using limit values 




Operation 

Parameterization the event-controlled focus control (alternative): 

Action Line scanner Line scanner with oscillating mirror 

1. Activate focus control function 

(choose trigger source) 

2. Choose focus switchover 

point (referred to reading 

pulse) 


Ö FOCUS TRIGGER SOURCE 

– Inputs/Serial or 

– Timer ÖTIMER or 

– Static/No Trigger 




– Latched 

3. Set up focus control DISTANCE CONFIGURATION/ASSIGNMENT TABLE 

Ö Distance Configuration 

– Focus Position 



Ö Assignment Table 

– Index 

– Valid Configurations 

4. In INPUTS/SERIAL trigger 

source: choose function for 

"IN 3" and "IN 4" switching 

inputs 

Ö DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab 

Ö ASSIGNMENT IN 3 

– Focus Control 



Table 6-6: Guide: Parameterizing the event-controlled focus control 


Ö FOCUS TRIGGER SOURCE 

– Inputs/Serial or 

– Timer or 

– Static/No Trigger 

– Oscillating mirror extrema 




– Latched 

DISTANCE CONFIGURATION/ASSIGNMENT TABLE 

Ö Distance Configuration 

– Focus Position 



– Oscillating mirror extrema 

Ö Assignment Table 

– Index 

– Valid Configurations 






Note 

The minimum and maximum values for the active evaluation range of the scan line (MIN. AND 

MAX. CODE POSITION) can be checked in the SHOW CP-LIMITS mode. 

See Chapter 6.5.5 Show CP-limits, Page 6-26. 


Chapter 6 

Operation 



Parameterization oscillating mirror functions: 

Action Line scanner with oscillating mirror 

1. Choose "Oscillating with fixed amplitude" 

mode 

(identical amplitude for all distance configurations 

with event-controlled focus control) 

– or – 

2. Choose "Oscillating with variable amplitude" 

mode 

(amplitude can be chosen for each distance 

configuration with event-controlled focus 

control) 

– or – 

3. Choose "Fixed Position" mode 

– or – 

Ö OSCILLATING MIRROR tab 

Ö OSCILLATING MIRROR 

– Oscillating with fixed amplitude 

Ö OSCILLATING 

– Frequency 



– Oscillating with variable amplitude 

Ö OSCILLATING 

– Frequency 


Ö EDIT AUTOFOCUS respectively 

Ö Distance Configurations 

– Oscillating Mirror Amplitude 



– Fixed Position 

Ö FIXED POSITION 

– Stationary Position (CW) 

4. Choose "One-Shot" mode Ö OSCILLATING MIRROR tab 


– One-Shot 

Ö ONE-SHOT 

Ö PHASE 1 

– Mirror Speed 

– Start Position 

– Distance Configuration (no.) 

Ö PHASE 2 

– Mirror Speed 

– Start Position 

– DistanceConfiguration (no.) 

5. With One-Shot: choose trigger source Ö OSCILLATING MIRROR tab 

Ö ONE-SHOT 

Ö TRIGGER MODE 

– Reading Trigger Pulse or 

– "IN 3" switching input or 

– "IN 4" switching input or 

– Serial Interface 

6. With One-Shot and trigger source "IN 3" or 

"IN 4": 

Choose function for switching input "IN 3" or 

"IN 4" 



– One Shot or 


– One Shot 

see also Table5-21, Page5-19 

7. Choose activity of oscillating mode Ö OSCILLATING MIRROR tab 

Ö OSCILLATING MIRROR acitve 

– continuous 

– during reading interval 

Table 6-7: Guide: Parameterizing oscillating mirror functions 




Operation 

Note 

The OSCILLATE WITH VARIABLE AMPILTUDE operating mode can only be selected from amplitudes 

of min. ±10 CW and an oscillating frequency of 0.4 Hz or higher. 

The scan line must always sweep the neutral position (CW = 50). This means that oscillation 

is not possible in the range 60 CW to 80 CW, for example, but is possible in the range 40 

CW to 80 CW. 

Explanation of oscillating mirror functions 

1. "Oscillating with fixed amplitude" mode 

The oscillating mirror deflects the scan line up to the maximum angle of deflection of 

±40 CW (corresponds to ±20°). Fig. 6-3 illustrates this mode when a bar code is read from 

above. 

Constant 

oscillating 

frequency 

0 0 

Scan line density depending on object height 

Fig. 6-3: 

Oscillating mirror: "Oscillating with fixed amplitude" mode 

2. "Oscillating with Variable Amplitude" mode 

The deflection range can be parameterized separately for each of the maximum of 8 distance 

configurations/focus positions. The minimum/maximum values that can be set for 

the deflection range for fast applications ensure that the scan line only sweeps areas that 

contain bar codes during the time available. This also ensures that the scan line density on 

the object is, for the most part, constant. Fig. 6-4, Page 6-14 illustrates this mode when a 

bar code is read from above. 


Chapter 6 

Operation 



Constant 

0 

oscillating 

frequency 

0 

1 

Limitation of the 

deflection range 

(CW value) 

Fig. 6-4: 

Scan line density equal, independant of object height 

Oscillating mirror: "Oscillating with variable amplitude" mode 

3. "Fixed Position" mode 

The CLV parks the oscillating mirror at the desired position. 10 CW corresponds to –20°, 

and 90 CW to +20° (see Fig. 4-8, Page 4-6). In the default setting, the fixed position is set 

to 50 CW (corresponds to an angle of deflection below 105°). The Oscillating mode is switched 

off. 

4. "One-Shot" mode 

In the "One-Shot" mode, the oscillating mirror only performs one specific oscillating movement 

per reading interval. This movement consists of a forward phase and a return phase. 

The start position of the scan line, the mirror speed and the valid distance configuration can 

be parameterized separately for each phase. The end position of the one phase forms the 

start position of the other phase. Fig. 6-5, Page 6-15 illustrates this mode with object 

tracking. During the forward phase, the front of the object that moves towards the oscillating 

mirror is swept once by the scan line from top to bottom in accordance with the conveyor 

speed. Multiple focus position switchovers are not necessary as the required reading range 

(DOF) is much smaller than with the line scanner. Fig. 10-42, Page 10-53 explains how the 

start position and mirror speed are calculated for a given conveyor speed. 

Possible trigger sources for One-Shot: 

• "IN 3" or "IN 4" switching input 

• Command string (via serial interface) 

• Reading interval 




Operation 

Conventionally required reading range 

t 0 

Reduced reading range through One-Shot function 

t 1 

Reading range 

Line scanner 



Reading range 

Fig. 6-5: 

One-Shot: Object tracking (bar code read from front) 


Chapter 6 

Operation 



b) Parameterizing the reading trigger source: 

Action Settings 

1. Reading trigger: choose source for start Ö DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab 

Ö •READING TRIGGER MODE 

– Sensor Input (Active High) or 

– Sensor Input (Active Low) or 

– Serial Interface or 

– Free Running with Timeout or 

– OPC-Trigger (special usage) or 

– OTS-Trigger (special usage) 

2. Trigger source "Sensor Input": Choose debouncing 

and response with first trigger 

3. Trigger source "Serial Interface": 

choose trigger character 

4. Trigger source "Free Running": 

choose timeout 

Ö EDIT READING TRIGGER 

Ö DEBOUNCING SENSOR 

– Standard or 

– Fast 

Ö FIRST TRIGGER SENSOR 

– Dynamic or 

– Static 


Ö SERIAL INTERFACE 

– Standard Trigger or 

– Single Character 


Ö END OF LABLE/FREE RUNNING 

– Timeout 

5. Reading trigger: choose source for end Ö EDIT READING TRIGGER 

Ö END OF READING INTERVAL 

– Generated by Trigger Source or 

– Timer or 

– Switching Input IN 4 

Table 6-8: Guide: Parameterizing the reading trigger source 

c) Parameterizing the laser timeout: 

Action 

1. Choose laser timeout duration 

– or – 

2. Deactivate laser timeout 

(The laser diode is always active, independent 

of the pulse duration) 

Table 6-9: Guide: Parameterizing the laser timeout 

Settings 



Ö LASER TIMEOUT 

– Duration 

Ö LASER TIMEOUT 

– Click (deactivate) the control box INTERVAL 

ACTIVE 




Operation 

d) Parameterizing the evaluation characteristics 

• Choose decoder type Ö CODE CONFIGURATION tab Ö Decoder 

• Activate code types for evaluation Ö CODE CONFIGURATION tab Ö Codes and Edit Codes 

• Activate code comparison Ö DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab Ö EDIT MATCH CODES 

• Define output time of reading result Ö CODE CONFIGURATION tab Ö Output on Good Read 

Number of bar codes per 

object 

Line scanner 

Stationary/moving conveyor 

object 

1. Number n = 1 Ö CODE CONFIGURATION tab 

Ö CODE POSITION 

– Deactivate "Compare" 

2. Number n > 1: 

– Same code type 

– Contents 

different or identical 

3. Number n > 1: 

– Code type 

different 

– Contents 

different or identical 


– Activate "Compare" 

Ö NUMBER OF CODES 

– Minimum 

– Maximum 




– Minimum 

– Maximum 

Table 6-10: Guide: Settings for evaluating identical bar codes 


Stationary conveyor object 

Ö CODE CONFIGURATION tab 






– Minimum 

– Maximum 


– Deactivate 

"Compare" 


– Minimum 

– Maximum 

Moving conveyor object 

Ö CODE CONFIGURATION tab 




– Minimum 

– Maximum 


Ö EDIT TRACKING PARAMETERS 

– Assigment tolerance 

Note 

If the number n > 1, minimum clearances must be provided in the following cases: 

• The SMART decoder is to read bar codes that originate from the same code type and 

have identical or different data contents 

• The standard decoder is to read and distinguish bar codes with the same name (identical 

code type and data content) 

The necessary calculations are provided in Chapter 10.8.3 Calculating the necessary bar 

code distance if several bar codes are read on each object, Page 10-54. 

e) Parameterizing the output characteristics 

Result status: Switching outputs 

• Define function of result status output of "Result 1" ... "Result 4" switching outputs: 

DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab Ö Edit Result Outputs• 

Main Data Interface general 

• Filter reading result Ö DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab Ö Odette filter 

• Sort reading result Ö DATA STRINGS tab Ö Output Sequence Sort 

• Mask reading result Ö DATA STRINGS tab Ö Format Mask 

• Destination result data strings Ö HOST INTERFACE tab Ö destination of result data strings 

Host Interface: 

• Arrangement in data network Ö DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab Ö scanner arrangement 

• Physical interface Ö HOST INTERFACE tab Ö Data Format 

• Communication parameters Ö HOST INTERFACE tab Ö Data Format 

• Protocol Ö HOST INTERFACE tab Ö Interface Protocol 


Chapter 6 

Operation 



Function of the CAN interface (alternative): 

See the operating instructions ”Application of the CAN interface” (no. 8 009 180) 

Data output string of host interface: 

• Choose contents of header, separator and terminator Ö DATA STRINGS tab 

Ö Output Format 

• Position of separator in data output string Ö DATA STRINGS tab 

Ö Separator Position 

• Set wrong read format Ö DATA STRINGS tab Ö Wrong read format, Character Count and 

Error String 

• If necessary, parameterize/activate test string Ö DATA STRINGS tab Ö Test String 

• Parameterize special functions Ö DATA STRINGS tab Ö Specials 

f) Parameterizing the auxiliary interface (terminal interface) 

• AUXILIARY INTERFACE tab 

g) Defining the start option for accessing the parameter set 

• On the DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab Ö choose START WITH 




Operation 

6.5 Operating modes and outputing the reading result 

The following CLV operating modes/functions can be selected in CLV-Setup: 

Standard operating mode: 

• Reading mode 

For setup: 

• Percentage evaluation 

• Adjusting mode 

For adapting the device to the application at hand: 

• Configuring (parameterizing ) the CLV 

See Chapter 6.4.1 Configuring the CLV via the user interface of CLV-Setup, Page 6-5 

• Background teach-in 

• Show CP-limits 

For monitoring purposes/trouble shooting 

• Display and edit operating data 

• Reading diagnosis 

• Monitor host interface 

• Auxiliary input 

• Self-test 

6.5.1 Reading mode (standard operating mode) 

The CLV performs a self-test after it has been switched on. It switches to Reading mode 

("Device Ready" LED lights up). In the default setting the "Sensor" switching input is the (external) 

trigger source of the reading pulse. The reading result is output by the CLV at the end 

of the reading pulse via the host interface (default setting) and terminal interface. 

The reading result of the terminal interface can be displayed in the CLV-Setup Terminal 

Emulator. The CLV terminal interface must be set to the READING DIAGNOSIS mode for this purpose. 

This mode is selected for the default setting. The reading result of the terminal interface 

has a fixed, invariable format. 

The Reading mode can be called up by choosing VIEW in the menu bar or via the Terminal 

Emulator. 


In the Reading mode the CLV deflects (by default) the scan line about the position CW = 50 

at a frequency of 1 Hz and a maximum angle of ±20°. 50 CW corresponds to an angle of 

deflection of 105°. 


Chapter 6 

Operation 



Displaying the reading result in the Terminal Emulator: 


The Terminal Emulator window is then displayed. 

2. In the DEVICE MODE section, choose READING MODE. 

3. Present the bar code pattern from Fig. 6-1 to the CLV and activate the reading pulse. 

The "Sensor" LED lights up and the scan line appears. Also refer to Chapter 6.3.1 Switching 

the CLV on for the first time with the factory default settings, Page 6-3. 

4. Ending the reading pulse. 

The CLV displays the reading result in the output window of the Terminal Emulator. 

The "Read Result" LED lights up for a duration of 100 ms (default setting). 

Fig. 6-6 shows two examples of the output of a reading result: Good Read and No Read. 

The reading result comprises the data contents of the bar code(s) and the reading diagnosis 

data. Fig. 6-7 explains the structure and function of the reading diagnosis data for Good 

Read, and Fig. 6-8, Page 6-21 for No Read. 

Fig. 6-6: 

CLV-Setup: Displaying the reading result in the Terminal Emulator 




Operation 

Good Read: 

TT=_ _130 ms MG=_65 % n=_1 AK=1 

0123412345 

C39 100% ST=0 CL=10 CP=_44 CD=_631 CS=_ _3 CA=_ _3 CK=_ _3 DI=F 

PO=–_43 OW=+_ _0 FC=_480 CX=_890 CY=_553 CZ=1481 

With: 

1st. line : TT = Duration of the reading interval 

MG = Temporal mean value of the identification quality 

n = Number of detected bar codes 

AK = No. of the used distance configuration 1) 

2nd. line: 0123412345 = Data contents of the bar code 

3rd. line: C39 = ID: Code type Code 39 along 

_99% = Identification quality 

ST = Read status (ST = 0: Good Read) 

CP = Code position 

CL = Code length (number of characters) 

CA = Scan effort 

CS = Code reliability 

CK = Code continuity 

DI = Decoding direction (F = in scanning direction, R = against 

scanning direction 

4th line PO = Exact code position (3-digit for tracking) 

OW = Exact oscillating angle (3-digit for tracking) 

FC = Current focus position (4-digit for tracking) 

CX = X-coordinate of bar code (for OTS in transport direction) 

CY = Y-coordinate of bar code (for OTS across to transport 

direction) 

CZ = Z-coordinate of bar code (for OTS from above directly) 

1) not relevant for autofocus function 

Fig. 6-7: 

Reading result of the terminal interface: structure for Good Read 

No Read: 

TT=_ _ 240 ms MG=_64 % n=_0 AK=1 

no code! 

1st. line : TT = Duration of the reading interval 

MG = Temporal mean value of the identification quality 

n = Number of codes detected 

AK = No. of the distance configuration used 1) 

2nd. line: no code! = No. bar codes found! 

Fig. 6-8: 

1) not relevant for autofocus function 

Reading result of the terminal interface: structure for No Read 

Note 

The CLV only outputs several bar codes in the reading result if the parameterized minimum 

and maximum number of bar codes is > 1, and several bar codes have been presented to 

it. The number of bar codes to be read/output for each reading interval can be selected in 

the CODE CONFIGURATION tab in the NUMBER OF CODES section. 

The reading result of the host interface can also be displayed. Chapter 6.5.8 Monitor Host 

Interface, Page 6-29 describes the procedure for this and the structure of the reading 

result in the default setting. 


Chapter 6 

Operation 



Triggering the reading pulse via the Terminal Emulator 

In the default setting the "Sensor" switching input is the (external) trigger source of the reading 

pulse. The reading pulse can also be triggered directly via the Terminal Emulator of CLV- 

Setup for test purposes. To do so, a different trigger source must be selected temporarily 

in the CLV. 

1. Choose DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab. 

2. In the READING TRIGGER MODE section click the SERIAL INTERFACE option. 

3. Perform a download to the CLV by clicking in the toolbar. 


4. Confirm the dialog box by choosing the TEMPORARY storage option. 

The serial interface has been activated as the trigger source of the reading pulse and 

is ready to receive appropriate commands. 



The CLV is in the Reading mode. 

6. Click the SW-TRIGGER ON button or press [F7]. 

CLV-Setup sends a start command to the CLV. 

The "Sensor" LED lights up and the scan line appears. 

7. Present the bar code pattern from Fig. 6-1, Page 6-3 to the CLV. 

8. Click the SW-TRIGGER OFF button or press [F8]. 

CLV-Setup sends a stop command to the CLV. The "Sensor" LED is extinguished. The 

CLV switches off the laser diode. The CLV displays the reading result in the output window 

of the Terminal Emulator. The "Read Result" LED lights up for a duration of 100 ms 

(default setting). 

6.5.2 Percentage evaluation 

In the Percentage evaluation mode, the quality of the reading function is assessed (no conveyor 

movement). 

The CLV performs 100 scans in the free running mode and evaluates the reading quality. It 

outputs the reading result continuously every 2 s via the terminal interface. The reading results 

can be displayed in the Terminal Emulator of CLV-Setup. The standard decoder has to 

be set temporarily for the percentage evaluation. 

The Percentage evaluation mode can be called up by choosing VIEW in the menu bar, as a 

device function via CLV 490 (interactively), or via the Terminal Emulator. 


In the Percent Evaluation mode, the CLV behaves in the following manner: 

– in "Oscillating" mode (basic setting: oscillating with a fixed amplitude), the CLV shuts off 

oscillation and positions the scan line under the angle CW = 50 (corresponds to a 

deflection angle below 105°). This position cannot be altered. 

– in "One-Shot" mode, the CLV positions the scan line under the angle CW = 50 as well. 

– in ”Fixed position” mode, however the scan line’s selected position remains unchanged. 




Operation 

1. Choose the CODE CONFIGURATION tab. 

2. In the DECODER section, choose STANDARD. 




The CLV then uses the standard decoder. 


The Terminal Emulator window is displayed. The CLV is in the Reading mode. 

6. In the DEVICE MODE section, choose PERCENTAGE EVALUATION 

The dialog box for choosing the distance configuration is then displayed. 

7. Choose the appropriate distance configuration for the reading distance: 

– with autofocus mode the distance configuration no. 1 

– with event-controlled focus control the distance configuration that corresponds to the 

reading distance of the object (default setting: no. 1, focus position F1 = 1 200 mm). 


The ”Device Ready” LED is extinguished. The CLV initiates the percentage evaluation 

and outputs the reading results continuously. 

9. Present the bar code pattern from Fig. 6-1, Page 6-3 and monitor the reading results 

in the Terminal Emulator window. An example of this can be seen in Fig. 6-9. 

The ”Read Result” LED also provides information on the reading quality: 

– The LED is extinguished if reading quality is < 30 % 

– The LED blinks twice per second if the reading quality is 30 % ... 70 % 

– The LED blinks five times per second if the reading quality is 70 % ... 90 % 

– The LED is lit continuously if the reading quality is > 90 % 

Fig. 6-9: 

CLV-Setup: Displaying the percentage evaluation in the Terminal Emulator 

The output format of the reading result is the same as that of the Reading mode. Fig. 6-7, 

Page 6-21 explains the structure and function of the reading diagnosis data. 


Chapter 6 

Operation 



6.5.3 Adjusting mode 

The Adjusting mode enables the center of the scan line to be optimally positioned on the 

bar code. Chapter 4.3.3 Adjusting mode, Page 4-9 describes the procedure for going about 

this after the Adjusting mode has been called up. The CLV does not output a reading result 

in this mode. 

The Adjusting mode can be called up by choosing VIEW in the menu bar, as a device 

function via CLV 490 (interactively), or via the Terminal Emulator. 


In the "Adjusting" mode, the CLV behaves in the following manner: 

– In "Oscillating" mode (default setting: oscillating with a fixed amplitude), the CLV shuts 

of oscillation and positions the scan line under the angle CW = 50 (corresponds to an 

angle of deflection below 105°). This position cannot be altered. 

– In "One-Shot" mode, the CLV positions the scan line under the angle CW = 50 

– In "Fixed Position" mode, the scan line’s selected position remains unchanged. 


The Terminal Emulator window is then displayed. The CLV is in the Reading mode. 

2. In the DEVICE MODE section, choose ADJUSTING MODE. 

The "Device Ready" LED is extinguished. The CLV cancels the Reading mode and 

blanks the scan line as of position CP = 50 to position CP = 100. 

3. Choose READING MODE to exit the Adjusting mode. 

The CLV returns to the Reading mode and the "Device Ready" LED lights up. 




Operation 

6.5.4 Background teach-in 

If the Autofocus function is used in the DIFFERENTIAL BACKGROUND or DIFFERENTIAL BACKGROUND 

WITH TRACKING mode, the CLV must first learn the ambient background in its reading field to 

narrow the reading field even further. When the internal distance profile is set, the reading 

field of the CLV must not contain any objects. In this mode, the CLV does not output any 

reading results. 

The Background teach-in function can be started as a device function via CLV 490 (interactively), 

or press the [F2] key. 


In the "Background teach-in" mode, the CLV behaves in the following manner: 


off oscillation and positions the scan line under the angle CW = 50 (corresponds to an 


– in "One-Shot" mode, the CLV positions the scan line under the angle CW = 50. 

– in "Fixed Position" mode, the scan line’s selected position remains unchanged. 

1. Mount the CLV at the reading station and align it with an object containing a bar code. 

2. Remove the object so that the CLV has an unobstructed view of the background. 

3. Choose CLV 490, DEVICE FUNCTIONS, BACKGROUND, TEACH-IN 

– or – 

press the [F2] key. 

The EXECUTE DEVICE FUNCTIONS window opens. 

Choose BACKGROUND, TEACH-IN in the EXECUTE menue. 

The "Device Ready" LED extinguishes. The CLV then scans its background and learns 

the ambient background so that it can create a suitable distance profile. 

The CLV outputs a message once the teach-in procedure has been successfully completed 

(see Fig. 6-10). 

The CLV has then learned the ambient background. 

Fig. 6-10: 

CLV-Setup: Dialog window for running the background teach-in 


Chapter 6 

Operation 



4. Choose CLOSE to close the window. 

If the parameters in the CLV were modified as a result of the teach-in procedure, CLV- 

Setup asks you whether you want to copy and display the modified parameter set by 

uploading it from the CLV. 

5. Confirm the query with YES. 

The dialog box closes automatically. 

The CLV resumes Reading mode and the "Device Ready" LED lights up. 

The new background distance profile can be uploaded and displayed in CLV-Setup. 

1. Choose the READING CONFIGURATION tab. 

2. In the AUTOFOCUS section, click the SHOW BACKGROUND button. 

The SHOW BACKGROUND dialog box appears. 

An example of a distance profile is shown in Fig. 6-11. 

Fig. 6-11: 

CLV-Setup: Display of th learned background 

6.5.5 Show CP-limits 

In this mode, the CLV blanks certain parts of the scan line so that any limit values defined 

for the active evaluation range of the scan line can be checked directly during parameterization. 

The restricted active evaluation range shortens the evaluation time for fast applications, 

for example, because the evaluation routine only has to take account of unblanked 

parts of the scan line. The range is restricted by entering appropriate values for MINIMUM 

CODE POSITION and MAXIMUM CODE POSITION in the EDIT DISTANCE CONFIGURATIONS dialog box in 

the READING CONFIGURATION tab. 

The CLV does not output a reading result in this mode. 

Show CP-limits enables you to check whether 

• The visible range of the CLV has been defined accordingly for the selected setting in 

Autofocus mode (restriction is independent of reading distance and always the same) 

• The restriction has been adapted for each active distance configuration in eventcontrolled 

dynamic focus control ("Christmas tree" effect) 

Show CP-limits can be called up via VIEW in the menu bar, as a device function via CLV 490 

(interactively), or via the Terminal Emulator. 




Operation 


In "Show CP-limits" mode, the CLV behaves in the following manner: 


off oscillation and positions the scan line under the angle CW = 50 (corresponds to an 


– in "One-Shot" mode, the CLV positions the scan line under the angle CW = 50. 

– in "Fixed Position" mode, the scan line’s selected position remains unchanged. 

The CLV blanks the scan line alternately as of the set value for CP min and as of the set value 

for CP max . Fig. 6-12 shows an example of this. The switchover is made continuously at intervals 

of 1 second. The part of the scan line that remains active for the reading procedure is 

the section between CP min and CP max . 

Example: 

Default setting: CP min = 5 to CP max = 95. 

The CLV blanks the line as of CP min = 5 (short scan line) and as of CP max = 95 (long line). 

Show CP limits 

Active range 

CP max 

CP min 

Scan line 2 

Scan line 1 

Fig. 6-12: 

Appearance of scan line in the "Show CP-limits" mode 

Proceed as follows to check the restricted evaluation range: 



2. In the DEVICE MODE section, choose SHOW CP-LIMITS. 

The dialog box for the distance configuration is then displayed. 

3. Click the distance configuration for which the active evaluation range of the scan line 

has been restricted (DC-specific). The "Device Ready" LED is extinguished. The CLV 

cancels the Reading mode and blanks the scan line alternately (as described above) as 

of CP min and CP max . 

4. Check Step 2 and 3 for each active distance configuration to determine whether the 

bar code is in the center of the range between the end of the shorter scan line (CP min ) 

and the end of the longer scan line (CP max ) or, if there are several bar codes, to determine 

whether the center of the field of all the codes is within the range. 

5. If necessary, correct CP min and CP max accordingly. Perform a download to the CLV! 

6. Choose READING MODE to exit the Show CP-limits mode. The CLV returns to the Reading 

mode and the ”Device Ready” LED lights up. 

Note 

In the Reading mode, the CLV does not actually blank the scan line visually, but instead takes 

the values specified for the restricted evaluation range into account when the data contents 

are decoded. 


Chapter 6 

Operation 



6.5.6 Displaying and editing operating data 

This function enables statistical operating data, which the CLV maintains in the form of counters 

during the reading procedure, to be displayed and reset. 

The CLV does not output a reading result in this mode. 

1. Click in the tool bar. 

The CLV cancels the Reading mode and the "Device Ready" LED is extinguished. The 

OPERATING DATA dialog box appears (Fig. 6-13). 

2. After checking/resetting the desired counters, click OK to confirm any changes made. 

The CLV then returns to the Reading mode and the "Device Ready" LED lights up. 

Fig. 6-13: 

CLV-Setup: "Operating Data" dialog box 

6.5.7 Reading diagnosis 

Function of the terminal interface. In this mode, the CLV outputs the data contents of all 

the bar codes that were read – including those that, according to the evaluation criteria, 

were not read properly and were thus incorrect – together with the associated reading 

diagnosis data via the terminal interface. The number of bar codes output can, therefore, be 

higher than the number of those that were sent via the host interface in the reading result. 

In the default setting, this mode is selected for the terminal interface. 

Fig. 6-7, Page 6-21 shows the output format of the terminal interface. 

In the default setting, the CLV only outputs the error status ST in the separator via the host 

interface. 




Operation 

If the reading diagnosis is to remain inactive, this can be set via the AUXILIARY INTERFACE tab. 

1. In the AUXILIARY INTERFACE drop-down list, choose READ DIAGNOSTICS. 



3. Choose the PERMANENT storage option in the dialog box. 

The terminal interface is now set to the "Read Diagnostics" mode. 

6.5.8 Monitor Host Interface 

Function of the terminal interface. In this mode, the CLV outputs the data traffic of its host 

interface via the terminal interface. Protocol driver handshakes and protocol-specific data, 

such as start and stop characters, are suppressed here. Each data string is displayed on a 

separate line on the screen. Two monitoring modes are available that differ with regard to 

the data output format (Table 6-11). 

Mode Direction of data Output format Representation on screen 

"Monitoring host interface" CLV receives from host I Data I Data 

CLV sends to host O Data O Data 

"Monitoring host interface 2" 

CLV receives from host 

CLV sends to host 

Table 6-11: "Monitor Host Interface" function 

Data 

Data 

Data 

Data 

The MONITOR HOST INTERFACE or MONITOR HOST INTERFACE 2 function is activated via the 

AUXILIARY INTERFACE tab. 

1. In the AUXILIARY INTERFACE drop-down list, choose MONITOR HOST INTERFACE or MONITOR 

HOST INTERFACE 2. 



3. Choose the TEMPORARY storage option in the dialog box. 

The terminal interface is then set to the MONITOR HOST INTERFACE function until the CLV is switched 

off again. 

Displaying the data traffic of the host interface in the Terminal Emulator: 

The data traffic of the host interface can be displayed in the Terminal Emulator of CLV-Setup. 

Fig. 6-14, Page 6-30 shows an example of how the reading result can be output. 

1. Choose the serial interface as the external trigger source for the reading pulse. 

See Chapter 6.5.1 Reading mode (standard operating mode), Page 6-19, Triggering the 

reading pulse via the Terminal Emulator. 



3. Click on the SW-TRIGGER ON button or press [F7]. 

The scan line then appears. 

4. Present the bar code pattern from Fig. 6-1, Page 6-3. 

5. Click the SW-TRIGGER OFF button or press [F8]. 

CLV-Setup outputs the reading result in the Terminal Emulator. 

Example: "O 0123412345". 


Chapter 6 

Operation 



Fig. 6-14: 

CLV-Setup: Displaying the reading result of the host interface in the Terminal Emulator 

with direction identifier at the beginning (in this case: O = Output) 

Note 

Tip 

If a large amount of data is being read in at high speed and with a high transmission rate, 

the host interface’s data trafficing may no longer be completely displayed on the terminal 

interface (display "..."). This is due to the slower transmission rate of the terminal interface 

(9 600 bit/s). 

In the default setting, the CLV sends the following in the data output string of the host interface: 

• Data contents of the bar codes 

• The ST error status in the separator 

• The control characters in the terminator 

The header is blank. 

The structure of the data output string of the host interface can be configured via the DATA 

STRINGS tab. 

Up to 10 elements, consisting of constants and/or reading diagnosis data, can be entered 

in the header, in the separator and in the terminator. 

1. Choose the DATA STRINGS tab. 

2. Click the HEADER field. 

The EDIT PARAMETER: TFH dialog box is then displayed. 

3. Click the desired constants or placeholders for the reading diagnosis data. 

The selected elements appear in the text box at the top of the dialog box in the 

sequence in which they were selected. 

4. Confirm the entries made by clicking OK. 

5. Repeat this procedure for the separator and terminator. 



7. Choose the PERMANENT storage option in the dialog box. 

The CLV outputs the selected elements in the data output string of the host interface 

with the next reading result. 




Operation 

6.5.9 Auxiliary input 

Function of the terminal interface. In this mode, the CLV accepts a bar code entered at the 

terminal interface (via the keyboard or handheld scanner with decoder). It sends the bar 

code to the host in a separate data string via its host interface. No reads can, therefore, be 

corrected by transmitting missing bar codes subsequently. 

Chapter 10.11.1 Auxiliary input, Page 10-65 describes this function and the associated procedure 

in greater detail. 

6.5.10Self-test 

After the CLV has been switched on, it performs a self-test before it is initialized with the 

parameter set. The test can be called up explicitly at any time via CLV-Setup. During the selftest, 

the CLV checks that its hardware components are functioning correctly. A final message 

via the terminal interface provides information on the test result. The CLV does not output 

a reading result during the test routine. 



2. In the DEVICE MODE section, choose SELF TEST. 

The "Device Ready" LED is extinguished. The CLV cancels the Reading mode and starts 

the test routine. 

After a few seconds, the CLV outputs the encoded test result in the form of a code 

number (Fig. 6-15). 

3. To return to the Reading mode, click READING MODE or close the Terminal Emulator. 

The CLV then returns to the Reading mode and the "Device Ready" LED lights up. 

Fig. 6-15: 

CLV-Setup: Displaying the self-test result in the Terminal Emulator 

The code number ”15000” means that the self-test was completed successfully and that 

no faults were diagnosed Chapter 8.3.1 CLV without external parameter memory, Page 8-2, 

lists the error keys together with the associated corrective measures. 


Chapter 6 

Operation 



6.5.11 Executing CLV functions interactively 

CLV-Setup enables a number of CLV functions to be executed interactively. CLV-Setup 

prompts the user to carry out specific actions and provides information on the progress of 

the function being executed. 

The following functions are available: 

• Background teach-in/reset (to default) 

• Percentage evaluation 

• Show CP-limits 

• Adjustment mode 

• Copy parameter memory 

• Analyze scanner network 

¾ 

Choose CLV 490, DEVICE FUNCTIONS and the desired function 

– or – 

press the [F2] key. 

The EXECUTE DEVICE FUNCTIONS dialog box is then displayed. 

Choose the desired function in the EXECUTE menu in the menu. 

CLV-Setup starts the function and, where appropriate, prompts the user to carry out the 

necessary actions. 

Fig. 6-16 shows an example of the dialog box that appears after Show CP-limits has been 

started. 

Fig. 6-16: 

CLV-Setup: Dialog box for executing Show limits 




Operation 

6.6 CLV messages 

The CLV outputs system, warning and error messages in English in response to the actions 

carried out by the user. The messages are output in plain text via the terminal interface only. 

6.6.1 Displaying messages 

Proceed as follows in order to display messages on the screen of the PC in the "CLV-Setup" 

program: 



2. In the TERMINAL MODE section, choose EXTENDED. 

The CLV then outputs messages in response to events that occur while the bar code is 

being read. The messages are only output in the extended mode of the Terminal Emulator! 

6.6.2 System messages 

System messages confirm that an action has been carried out successfully, e. g. changing 

the operating mode. The user is not required to carry out any further steps here. 

Chapter 10.5 System messages, Page 10-40 explains the contents of the messages. 

6.6.3 Warning messages 

Warning messages indicate that it was not possible to perform an action or that the values 

set for the parameters can cause an error while the bar code is being read. 

Table 6-12 lists the warning messages in alphabetical order together with the associated 

corrective measures. 

Message Meaning Remedy 

"Warning: Master Timeout" The selected master timeout is too short Optimize the master timeout using the DEVICE 

CONFIGURATION tab in the user interface of CLV- 

Setup. Perform a download to the CLV! 

Table 6-12: Warning messages 

See also Technical Information "Master/Slave 

with Bar Code Scanners", no. 8 007 675 

6.6.4 Error messages 

Error messages indicate the following types of error: 

• a device defect 

• incorrect parameter settings 

• errors during data transmission to the host 

Chapter 8.3.1 CLV without external parameter memory, Page 8-2 lists the messages in 

alphabetical order together with the associated corrective measures. 


Chapter 6 

Operation 



6.7 Switching off the CLV 

1. If the parameter set was modified in CLV-Setup or was only stored temporarily in CLV 

via a download, the parameter set must be stored permanently in the CLV by choosing 

the PERMANENT storage option. 

2. Save the parameter set as a configuration file "*.scl" in CLV-Setup. 

3. Switch off the power supply of the AMV/S 60 or unplug both of the CLV’s connecting 

cables from the connection module. 

The last parameter set stored permanently in the CLV remains valid. 

We recommend that you print out the configuration file in order to archive the parameter set. 


The PRINT FILE dialog box is then displayed. 

2. Enter a comment in the input field in order to assign the printout to the CLV. 

Confirm your entry with OK. 

The PRINT dialog box for configuring the printer is then displayed. 

3. Make the necessary entries in the dialog box and confirm these. 

CLV-Setup prints out the current configuration file in the form of a table. 




7 Maintenance 

Maintenance 

7.1 Cleaning the CLV during operation 

To ensure optimum reading performance, the reading window of the CLV must be clean at 

all times. For this reason, we recommend that you check the reading window at regular 

intervals, particularly if the device is operated under extreme conditions (dust, abrasion, 

humidity, finger prints). 

Laser beam can cause blindness! 

The CLV uses a class 2 red-light laser. Looking directly at the laser beam can seriously 

damage your eyesight. 

¾ 

¾ 

¾ 

Never look directly into the path of the beam (similar to sunlight). 

Never look directly into the reading window while the device is in operation. 

Switch off the device while it is being cleaned. 

Damage on the reading window! 

The reading window is made of glass. Scratches and streaks on the window will reduce the 

reading performance. 

¾ 

¾ 

Use a mild, non-scouring detergent. 

Never use scratching or scouring motions to clean the reading window. 

Cleaning the reading window: 

¾ Clean the reading window at regular intervals with a mild, non-scouring detergent, e. g. 

an antistatic glass cleaning fluid. Fig. 7-1 shows the areas that require cleaning. Use 

soft, lint-free cloth. 

¾ If necessary, clean the LEDs on the rear of the device. 

Clean here 

Front reading window 

Side reading window 

Fig. 7-1: 

Cleaning the reading window 


Chapter 7 

Maintenance 



Cleaning other optical surfaces: 

¾ 

If an external reading pulse generator and/or object-height detection sensors are used 

(e. g. photoelectric reflex switches), make sure to clean the relevant optical surfaces 

(Fig. 7-2). Contamination on these surfaces can cause switching errors. 

Fig. 7-2: 

Cleaning the external optical sensors (reading pulse generator, object-height detector) 

7.2 Maintenance 

The CLV does not require any maintenance. Its self-monitoring functions ensure fault-free 

operation over long periods of time. 

Any faults or malfunctions are displayed on the terminal interface. The messages can be 

displayed on the screen in the extended mode of the Terminal Emulator in the "CLV-Setup" 

program. See Chapter 8.3 Error messages, Page 8-2. 

7.3 Disposal 

Irreparable devices or devices that are no longer required must be disposed of in an 

environmentally-friendly manner: 

1. Always observe the applicable national waste disposal regulations. 

2. Remove the CLV housing. 

3. Remove the electronic modules. 

4. Remove the glass panel from the reading window and send it to be recycled. 

5. Send the chassis and cover (aluminium) to be recycled. 

6. Send the electronic modules for disposal as problem waste. 

At present, SICK AG does not accept any unusable or irreparable devices. 




Troubleshooting 

8 Troubleshooting 

8.1 Overview of the possible errors and malfunctions 

8.1.1 Mounting errors 

• CLV aligned incorrectly with the object carrying the bar code (e. g. blanking) 

• Reading pulse sensor positioned incorrectly 

• With event-controlled focus control: sensors for object height detection positioned 

incorrectly 

8.1.2 Electrical installation errors 

• Interfaces on the CLV connected incorrectly (wiring error in AMV/S 60) 

• Host interface on AMV/S 60 configured incorrectly 

8.1.3 Parameter errors 

• Functions not adjusted to local conditions, e. g. communication parameters on the host 

interface are set incorrectly 

• Technical limits of the device exceeded, e. g. relationship between the scanning 

frequency and the reading distance 

8.1.4 Malfunctions 

• Laser timeout for incorrectly terminated reading pulse 

• Device error (hardware/software) 

8.2 Monitoring error and malfunctions 

The CLV is self-monitoring: 

• After the power supply has been switched on, the CLV automatically carries out a selftest, 

in which it checks important hardware components, before it is initialized 

(parameter set loaded and device functions initialized). The self-test can be repeated 

at any time by cancelling Reading mode. See Chapter 6.5.10 Self-test, Page 6-31. 

• If the CLV detects an error during the self-test or at any other time, it outputs the error 

status ST=3 on the host interface. Prerequisite: the error status is enabled for transmission. 

This is enabled by default. The CLV displays the diagnosed error as a numeric 

combination on the terminal interface (see Table 8-1). 

• While it is in operation, the CLV constantly monitors the laser diode and speed of the 

polygon mirror wheel. In addition, a watchdog circuit responds to error statuses. CLV 

carries out distance measurement referencing at regular cycles. To do so, the laser 

diode is switched on for max. 10 s. 

• A timer (laser timeout) automatically deactivates the laser diode in Reading mode 

("Sensor input" and "Serial interface trigger" mode) if the reading interval has not ended 

after 10 minutes (default setting). However, it does not end the reading interval. In this 

case, the CLV outputs the message: Laser safety timeout on the terminal interface. The 

reading interval must be terminated by resetting the trigger signal. The laser diode is 

activated again by the next reading trigger. 


Chapter 8 




8.3 Error messages 

The CLV outputs error message in English on the terminal interface only. Table 8-1 contains 

a list of the messages in alphabetical order. 

For warnings, see Chapter 6.6.3 Warning messages, Page 6-33. 

Displaying messages: 

To display the messages on the PC, proceed as follows: 


The Terminal Emulator is launched. 

2. Click the EXTENTED option in the TERMINAL MODE section. 

8.3.1 CLV without external parameter memory 

Message Meaning Possible cause Remedy 

"CLV SYS-Failure: xxx" The CLV has diagnosed a 

system error. 

The "Device Ready" LED does 

not light up or extinguishes. 

The system is restarted. 

"EEPROM Check fault, 

default parameters loaded" 

"EEPROM - reading fault" 

"EEPROM - writing fault" 

"Focus table inconsistent: 

defaults loaded" 

The CLV has diagnosed an 

irregularity in the EEPROM and 

downloads the entire default 

settings to the RAM instead of 

the permanently stored 

application-specific parameters. 

The CLV cannot load the application-specific 

parameters, permanently 

stored in the EEPROM, 

into the RAM. 

The CLV cannot write the 

current parameters in the RAM 

to the EEPROM. 

The CLV has diagnosed an 

irregularity in the internal reference 

table for the focus positions 

selected by the user. It 

therefore loads the default setting 

of the distance configurations. 

Table 8-1: Error messages output on the terminal interface 

Error key: 1) 

011 Data error (RAM) 

012 Address error (RAM) 

013 RAM to small 

051 Speed out of tolerance 

(mirror wheel) 

061 Mirror interval out of 

tolerance 

071 Error: laser shutter 

091...095 Error: focus control 

101...118 Error: external parameter 

memory 

130 Amplifier error 

131 Background profile 

invalid 

132 Center position CP 50 

implausible 

133 Brightness overflow 

201...215 DSP error 

Device fault. 

Device fault. 

Device fault. 

Device fault. 

If the error occurs again after the 

CLV is restarted, contact the SICK 

Service department. 

1) Deactivate the CAN interface 

to suppress error numbers above 

300 (not relevant in stand-alone 

mode). To do so, upload the 

parameter set from the CLV using 

CLV-Setup, choose the CAN 

INTERFACE tab and deactivate the 

function in the CAN INTERFACE 

FUNCTION section. 

Download the parameter set to 

the CLV! 

Contact the SICK Service 

department. 


department. 


department. 


department. 






"Host – Receive fault" 

"Host - transfer to slow" 

"Host - transmit fault" 

"Master/slave - trigger too 

soon" 

"No polls" 

"Oscillating mirror faulty" 

The host has requested the 

data output string last sent by 

the CLV three times; NAK has 

been issued with each attempt. 

In the CLV, data is available for 

output faster than it is transmitted 

to the host. 

The CLV cannot correctly 

receive the data sent by the 

host. 

The new reading pulse for the 

master is received before its 

timeout has elapsed. 

Network operation: the CLV is 

waiting for polls by the CLX 200 

network controller. 

The CLV cannot operate the 

oscillating mirror or cannot initialize 

the mirror. 


• Host receive set incorrectly 

• Data transmission interrupted 

e. g. by cable break 

• Baud rate too low 

• Incorrect protocol type selected 

• Protocol timeout too long for 

the reading pulse frequency 

• Host interface of the CLV configured 

incorrectly 

• Data transmission interrupted 

e. g. by cable break 

Timeout for the master is too long 

• Data connecting cable interrupted 

• CLX 200 not ready 

• Incorrect device number parameterized 

• Inadvertently parameterized for 

network operation 

Device fault. 

• Check the host 

• Check connecting cable and 

monitor data transfer of the 

host interface. To do so, select 

upload from the CLV by using 

the "CLV-Setup" progam, 

select the AUXILIARY INTERFACE 

tab and select MONITOR HOST 

INTERFACE in the drop down list. 

Download to the CLV! 

Start the Terminal Emulator. 

Check the configuration of 

the host interface. 

• Check the CLV and host. 

• Check connecting cable and 

monitor data transmission at 

the host interface. To do so, 

upload from the CLV using the 

"CLV-Setup" program, choose 

the AUXILIARY INTERFACE tab and 

select MONITOR HOST INTERFACE 

from the drop-down list. 


Start the Terminal Emulator. 

Check the coordination between 

reading pulse and timeout. To do 

so, upload from the CLV using the 

"CLV-Setup" program, choose the 

DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab and 

change the MASTER TIMEOUT in the 

SCANNER ARRANGEMENT section. 

Download the changes to the 

CLV! 

• Check cables. 

• Switch on CLX 200 

• Device number: 01 to 31 

• Check the configuration of the 

host interface. 

To do so, upload from the CLV 

using the "CLV-Setup" program, 

choose the HOST INTER- 

FACE tab and check the settings 

in the INTERFACE PROTOCOL section. 

Download the changes to the 

CLV! 

Contact the SICK Service department. 


Chapter 8 





"Slave string faulty" 

"Wrong number of slaves" 

"Wrong parameters – 

master/slave" 

Data transmission error 

between a slave and the master. 

During the master timeout, the 

master receives more or fewer 

reading results from the slaves 

than expected from the number 

of slaves that the master 

has entered. 

After selection of the master/ 

slave function, individual parameter 

values, which are not compatible 

with the automatic 

settings defined for this function 

by the CLV, were changed subsequently 


Data connecting cable 

interrupted. 

• The parameterized number of 

slaves does not match the actual 

number of slaves connected 

• Timeout for the master is too 

short 

• The data connection between 

the slaves has been interrupted. 

Deviations from the following settings: 

• Test string: no (slaves) 

• Aux. input: no (slaves) 

• Triggermode: serial interface or 

switching input 

• RK 512: without reaction telegram 

If the error continues to occur, 

check the connecting cable 

between all devices. 

• Check the entered number of 

slaves. 

To do so, upload from the CLV 

using the "CLV-Setup" program, 

choose the DEVICE CONFI- 

GURATION tab and check the 

NUMBER OF SLAVES in the SCAN- 

NER ARRANGEMENT section. 

Download any changes to the 

CLV! 

• As above, but check the timeout 

defined for the master 

• Check the cables between the 

slaves 

Correct the settings on the 

DATA STRING, 

TERMINAL INTERFACE, 

DEVICE CONFIGURATION and 

HOST INTERFACE tabs in the "CLV- 

Setup" program. 

Download any changes to the 

CLV! 





8.3.2 LED error messages for the external parameter memory 

The CLV also reports errors accessing the external parameter memory by means of the "Device 

Ready" and "Read Result" LEDs. 

LED behavior Meaning Possible cause Remedy 

1. When the device is 

switched on, the "Device 

Ready" LED blinks for 

approx. 10 s and then 

lights up constantly. 


switched on, the Device 

Ready and "Read Result" 

LEDs blink for approx. 

10 s. 

The "Device Ready" LED 

then lights up constantly. 

3. The "Device Ready" LED 

lights up constantly when 

the device is switched on. 



Ready" LED and "Read 

Result" LEDs blink continuously 

2) . 

Start option: START WITH EXTER- 

NAL PARAMETERS. 

The CLV has successfully loaded 

the external parameter set to its 

RAM. 



The CLV has successfully 

loaded the external parameter 

set with tolerated errors 1) to its 

RAM 

• Start option: START WITH EX- 

TERNAL PARAMETERS. 

The CLV has not loaded external 

parameter set. Instead, 

it has loaded the internal parameter 

set to its RAM. 

• Start option: START WITH INTER- 



loaded the internal parameter 




The CLV has not loaded the 

external parameter set. Instead, 

it has loaded the internal 

parameter set to its RAM. 

The CLV, however, does not 

output data on the host 

interface. 

– None 

Transfer ok, but different parameter 

versions in the external memory 

and CLV. 

• External parameter memory not 

connected. 

• Start ok. 

• External parameter memory 

empty. 


connected. 

• The parameter set in the external 

memory is not from a 

CLV 490. 

• External parameter memory is 

defective. 

Upload parameter set to CLV- 

Setup and check parameters 1) . 

• OK if the device is to be 

operated without an external 

parameter memory. 

• Check whether the external 

parameter memory is connected 

correctly (free wiring: check 

wire assignment). 

• None. 

• If the device is being used for 

the first time, data must first be 

loaded to the external 

parameter memory. 

See Chapter 6.3.2 Switching 

the CLV with external parameter 

memory connected on 

for the first time with the factory 

default settings, Page 6-4. 

• See 3 Remedy. 

• Use the correct external parameter 

memory or overwrite 

the current one. See 

4 Remedy, 1st pragraph. 

• Repeat the startup procedure. 

If the error is still present after 

following 4 Remedy, 2nd and 

3rd paragraph, contact the 

SICK Service department. 

1) The software of the parameter set in the CLV is older than that of the parameter set in the external memory: print out the parameter set using CLV-Setup. If necessary, 

display the ID of the unknown/errored command group(s) using the 8ERR command in the Terminal Emulator window of CLV-Setup. Decode the ID using 

the reference manual entitled Command Language of the CLV Bar Code Scanners and check the relevant parameter values in the tabs. 

The software of the parameter set in the CLV is newer than that of the parameter set in the external memory: all of the new parameters in the CLV are set to the default 

values. If these parameters are necessary, edit the values in the relevant tabs in CLV-Setup and download them to the CLV and the external memory. 

2) Flashing stops when the device switches from Reading mode to Parameter mode (e. g. during download from CLV-Setup). 

Table 8-2: LED error messages for access to the external parameter memory 


Chapter 8 




LED behavior Meaning Possible cause Remedy 


swiched on, the "Device 


Result" LEDs blink continuously 

2) . 

– continued – 




Result" LEDs blink 

alternately for approx. 

10 s. The "Device Ready" 

LED then lights up constantly. 

• Start option: START WITH COPY 

INTERN –> EXTERN. 

The CLV was not able to copy 

the internal parameter set to 

the external memory. 

It has loaded the internal parameter 


Start option: START WITH COPY 



copied the internal parameter 

set to the external memory 3) 

and set the option for the next 

start to START WITH EXTERNAL 

PARAMETERS. It has loaded the 

internal parameter set to its 

RAM. 

• External parameter 

memory is not connected. 

• Data transmission error. 

• Internal parameter set too large 

to be copied to the external memory 

(memory is full). 

• The external parameter memory 

is defective. 

Transfer ok. 

• Ensure that the external parameter 

memory is connected 

correctly (free wiring: check 

wire assignment). 

• Repeat the startup procedure. 

If the error is still present after 

following 4 Remedy, 2nd and 

3rd paragraph, contact the 

SICK Service department. 

• Contact the SICK Service 

department. 

• See 4 Remedy, 4th paragraph 

Not applicable. 

2) Flashing stops when the device switches from Reading mode to Parameter mode (e. g. during download from CLV-Setup). 

3) The parameter set stored in the external memory is not checked automatically to determine whether it can be read. To check the parameter set, switch off the power 

supply to the CLV briefly and monitor the "Device Ready" LED as described under 1. 

Table 8-2: LED error messages for access to the external parameter memory 





8.3.3 Messages for errors accessing the external parameter memory 

The CLV outputs further error messages, in addition to the general error messages in 

Chapter 8.3.1 CLV without external parameter memory, Page 8-2, if problems arise when 

the external parameter memory is accessed. 


1. "error: access to external 

parameters not successful, 

internal parameters 

loaded" 

(Error type: 104, 105, 

106, 111, 112,115) 

2. "error: external parameter 

memory empty, 


loaded" 

(Error type: 103) 

3. "error: external parameter 

memory full, 


loaded" 


4. "error: external parameters 

not valid for device, 


loaded" 


5. "error: no external parameter 

memory connected, 


loaded" 








The CLV, however, does not 

output data on the host interface. 




the internal parameter memory. 

It has loaded the internal 











the internal parameter memory. 

It has loaded the internal parameter 







set to its RAM. The 

CLV, however, does not output 

data on the host interface. 











the external memory. It has 



Table 8-3: Messages for problems accessing the external parameter memory 

The external parameter memory is 

defective. 

The external parameter memory is 

empty. 

The internal parameter set is too 

large for the external memory 

(memory is full). 

The parameter set in the external 

memory is not from a CLV 490. 


connected. 


connected. 

Repeat the startup procedure. If 

the error is still present, contact 

the SICK Service department. 

If the device is being used for the 

first time, data must first be 

loaded to the external parameter 

memory. See Chapter 6.3.2 

Switching the CLV with external 

parameter memory connected on 

for the first time with the factory 

default settings, Page 6-4. 

Contact the SICK Service department. 

Use the correct external parameter 

memory or overwrite the 

current one. 

See 2 Remedy. 

• OK if the device is to be operated 

without an external parameter 

memory. 

• Check whether the memory is 

connected correctly (free 

wiring: check wire assignment). 

• See 5 Remedy 2nd paragraph 


Chapter 8 





6. "error: writing parameters 

CLV -> EXT, 


loaded" 

(Error type: 110, 111, 

112) 

7. "warning: additional 

unknown parameter(s), 

external parameters 

loaded" 

(Error type: 101, 114) 





the external memory. It has 


set to its RAM 




loaded the external parameter 

set with tolerated errors 1) to its 

RAM. 

Data transmission error. 

Table 8-3: Messages for problems accessing the external parameter memory 

Transfer ok but different parameter 

versions in the external 

memory and the CLV. 

Check whether the external parameter 

memory is connected correctly 

(free wiring: check wire 

assignment). 

Repeat the startup procedure. If 

the error is still present, contact 


Upload the parameter set to CLV- 

Setup and check the values 1) . 

1) see footnote 1) in Table 8-2, 

Page 8-5 





8.4 ST error status in the reading result of a bar code 

Value Meaning Possible cause Remedy 

0 Good Read. – None 

1 Incorrect check digit. The check digit calculated by the CLV 

during the reading process does not 

match that printed in the bar code. 

2 No bar code of the enabled code type 

found according to the evaluation 

criteria. 

• No bar code in the CLV‘s reading 

field during the reading pulse 

• Code type/length in the CLV not 

enabled for decoding 

• Reading window obstructed/dirty 

Check whether the check digits in 

the bar code and generated by the 

print process are correct. 

• Synchronize the pulse of the CLV with 

the entry of a bar code into the 

reading field. 

• Correct the code configuration parameters. 

• Check the reading window. 

3 Device fault. Device fault. Call up the self-test. See Chapter 6.5.10 

Self-test, Page 6-31. 

If result ≠ 15000: Contact the SICK Service 

department. 

5 Required number of successful multiple 

reads for the bar code not reached. 

6 Master: 

Number of slave reading results does 

not match the parameterized number of 

slaves. 

7 The source of the reading result is the 

auxiliary input via the terminal interface. 

9 The OUTPUT FILTER function is activated 

for the code comparison. The CLV has 

detected valid bar codes. However, 

these do not match the active match 

code(s). 

A 

D 

The CHECK MAX. NUMBER OF CODES 

function is active. The number of valid 

bar codes detected by the CLV in Reading 

mode exceeds that specified under 

NUMBER OF CODES: MAXIMUM . 

It repeatedly outputs the defined error 

string until the number specified under 

NUMBER OF CODES: MINIMUM is reached. 

The CODE 32 evaluation option is activated 

for Code 39. The CLV is 

attempting to interpret 6-digit C39 bar 

codes as C32 bar codes (output as 9- 

digit decimal values). 

Table 8-4: Meaning of the ST error status in the reading result 

• Conveyor speed of the object is too 

high 

• Scanning frequency is too low 

• Ladder-type arrangement for bar 

code relative to the conveyor direction: 

code height (bar length) too poor 

• Print quality too poor 

• The parameterized number of slaves 

does not match the actual number of 

slaves available 

• The master timeout is too short 

• The data connection between the 

slaves and/or the master has been 

interrupted 

The bar code was not detected by the 

reading function of the CLV, but was 

entered subsequently with the auxiliary 

function of the terminal interface and 

sent to the host in a separate data 

string. 

The scanned object does not have a bar 

code that matches the specified match 

code. 

One object in a set of objects with a 

constant number of bar codes, for 

example, contains more bar codes than 

defined in the application. 

The read 6-digit bar code is not a C32 

bar code. The CLV outputs the defined 

error string instead. 

• Check the conveyor speed. 

• Adjust the scanning frequency. 

• Check the code height. 

• Check the print quality. 

• Check the entered number of slaves. 

• Check the master timeout setting. 

• Check the cables between the slaves 

and the master. 

– 

– 

This message is used to indicate 

errors on the objects (e. g. check 

whether objects are homogeneous: 

mixed with incorrect objects). 

– 


Chapter 8 




8.5 Troubleshooting 

The following are required for troubleshooting purposes using the tables below: 

• These Operating Instructions 

• Tools 

• A tape measure (up to 3 000 mm) 

• A digital measuring device (current/voltage measurement) 

• A PC running CLV-Setup 

• RS 232 data connection cable (pins 2 and 3 crossed), e. g. no. 2 014 054 

8.5.1 General malfunctions: CLV not ready 

Malfunction Possible cause Remedy 

The "Device Ready" LED is not 

lit. 

The "Result 1" output is not outputting 

a pulse 

(default setting: Device Ready) 

After switching on the power 

supply: 

• The CLV has no power 

• The CLV has diagnosed a 

device error during the selftest 

During operation: 

• The CLV is not in "Reading" 

mode 

• The CLV has deactivated the 

laser diode 10 min. (default 

setting) after the start of the 

current reading pulse (trigger 

mode: sensor input/serial 

interface) 

Table 8-5: Troubleshooting: restoring operation (Reading mode) 

• Check wiring (power 

connector fitted 

securely to the AMV/S 60 

Connection Module). 

Measure voltage at pin 1 and 

pin 5. 

• Switch CLV off and on again. 

Does the LED light up If not, 

contact SICK Service department 

• Return to Reading mode 

using the "CLV-Setup" program. 

See Chapter 6.5.1 

Reading mode (standard 

operating mode), Page 6-19 

• Terminate reading pulse. 

Check the reading pulse 

function. Supply new pulse. 

See Table 6-9, Page 6-16, 





8.5.2 Malfunctions in Reading mode: reading trigger errors 

¾ 

Check whether the "Device Ready" LED lights up. 

If the LED does not light, see Table 8-5, Page 8-10. 


1. Trigger mode: 

Sensor input (external sensor). 

The CLV cannot be clocked: 

– the "Sensor" LED does not 

light up 

– the scan lines don’t 

appear 

2. Trigger mode: 

Serial interface 

The CLV cannot be clocked: 

– the Sensor LED does not light up 

– the scan line does not appear 

3. CLV does not respond to an 

external signal that ends the reading 

pulse (sensor input, serial interface) 

• Sensor not connected or connected to 

incorrect switching input. 

• If sensor supplied by CLV: sensor not 

connected to ground potential 

• Incorrect reading pulse source parameterized 

in the CLV 

• Photoelectric switch not aligned with the 

reflector (photoelectric proximity switch/ 

inductive sensor not dampened) 

• Incorrect reading pulse source parameterized 

on the CLV 

• The CLV is not receiving any command 

strings to start the reading interval on the 

data interface 

Incorrect end of reading pulse parameterized 

on the CLV 

• Connect sensor to "Sensor" switching 

input. Check sensor wiring (see Fig. 5-4, 

Page 5-16). Measure output signal on 

sensor. 

• Insert jumper between pin 5 and pin 15 

• In the "CLV-Setup" program: choose the 

DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab, READING TRIG- 

GER Mode section: Sensor input selected 

(active high: reading pulse starts 

when power applied) 

• Align sensor. 

Check functioning 


DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab, READING TRIG- 

GER Mode section: is serial interface selected 

SERIAL INTERFACE section: is 

trigger type correct 

• Check data connection to host. In the 

"CLV-Setup" program: choose the HOST 

INTERFACE tab. 

In DATA FORMAT section: are the correct 

interface type (hardware) and data format 

selected 

INTERFACE PROTOCOL section: are the correct 

start and stop characters selected 

Use the "CLV-Setup" program to check 

the host command strings: choose 

AUXILIARY INTERFACE tab. Choose 

MONITOR HOST INTERFACE function. 

See Chapter 6.5.8 Monitor Host Interface, 

Page 6-29. 

Download temporarily to the CLV. 

In the "CLV-Setup" program: 

choose the DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab, click 

the EDIT READING TRIGGER button. 

END OF READING INTERVAL section: is generated 

by Trigger Source selected 

Table 8-6: Troubleshooting: reading trigger errors in Reading mode 


Chapter 8 




8.5.3 Malfunctions in Reading mode: result output errors 

¾ 



Here: number of bar codes to be read = 1 


1. The "Read Result" LED (default setting: 

Good Read) does not light up at the end 

of the reading pulse. 

– The "Result 2" switching output 

(default setting: Good Read) is not 

outputting a pulse 

– The CLV outputs status ST=2 in the 

reading result on the host interface 

• Read not successful, since there was no 

bar code in the reading field during the 

reading pulse 

• Scan line positioned incorrectly 

• Evaluation range of the scan line is 

limited unfavourable (CP values) 

• Bar code presented at incorrect reading 

distance 

• The presented bar code’s module width 

cannot be read by the CLV type being 

used 

• With event-controlled focus control: 

wrong focus position in Distance Configuration 

choosen. 

• With event-controlled focus control: 

trigger source parameterized incorrectly. 

• The bar code is tilted excessively with 

respect to the scan line 

• Synchronize read with presence of an 

object in reading field. See Chapter 8.5.2 

Malfunctions in Reading mode: reading 

trigger errors, Page 8-11 

• Align CLV. Is bar code at center of scan 

line Check the reading quality with the 

"CLV-Setup" software. Choose PERCEN- 

TAGE EVALUATION. See Chapter 6.5.2 Percentage 

evaluation, Page 6-22 


READING CONFIGURATION tab, click the EDIT 

AUTOFOCUS respectively DISTANCE CONFI- 

GURATION/ASSIGMENT TABLE button. Are the 

min. and max. code position values correct 

Check with SHOW CP-LIMITS. See 

Chapter 6.5.5 Show CP-limits, 

Page 6-26 

• Check whether reading distance of bar 

code is in the specified reading range 

• Present a bar code with an acceptable 

module width. See Chapter 9 Technical 

data, Page 9-1 


READING CONFIGURATION tab, click the DI- 

STANCE CONFIGURATION/ASSIGNMENT TABLE 

button. Does the focus position match 

the distance of the object 


READING CONFIGURATION tab, in the 

FOCUS TRIGGER section. 

a) Trigger source "Switching input": 

Check functional assignment of IN 3 and 

IN 4 and connection of the sensors. See 

Fig. 5-5, Page 5-17 

b) Trigger source: "Serial interface": 

Check the data connection to the host. 

Use the "CLV-Setup" program to check 

the host command strings: choose AUXI- 

LIARY INTERFACE tab. Choose MONITOR 

HOST INTERFACE function. See 

Chapter 6.5.8 Monitor Host Interface, 

Page 6-29. Download temporarily to 

CLV! 

c)Trigger source: Timer: 

Check switchover time 


CODE CONFIGURATION tab, DECODER section: 

choose SMART decoder. 

Download all changes to CLV! 

Table 8-7: Troubleshooting: result output errors in Reading mode 






1. The "Read Result" LED default setting: 

Good Read) does not light up at the end 

of the reading pulse: 

– continued – 

2. The CLV is not transferring any reading 

results to the host 

3. The CLV transfers the status ST=3 to the 

host in the reading result 

• The reading angles at which the bar code 

appears to the CLV are too large 

• Bar code in total reflection zone 

• Evaluation criteria for bar code incorrect 

• Bar code quality inadequate 

• Reading pulse is not functioning correctly 

• Wiring fault in data connection 

• Voltage level incorrect 

• Host interface in CLV parameterized 

incorrectly 

The CLV has diagnosed a device error in the 

selftest 


CODE CONFIGURATION tab, DECODER section: 

choose Standard decoder. Download 

temporarily to CLV! 

Start PERCENTAGE EVALUATION, choose 

DISTANCE CONFIGURATION. Monitor reading 

quality (reading quality > 70 %!). If 

necessary, realign CLV and/or reconfigure 

distance configuration. 

If ok, choose SMART DECODER. 

Download to CLV. 

• Optimize CLV alignment (scan line should 

strike the bar code at a skew of approx. 

15°) Use the "CLV-Setup" program to 

check the quality of the read. Start PER- 

CENTAGE EVALUATION. See Chapter 6.5.2 

Percentage evaluation, Page 6-22 

• In "CLV-Setup" program: choose the 

READING CONFIGURATION tab, CODES 

section. Enable all code types (except 

Pharmacode), set code lengths to FREE. 

Download temporarily to CLV! 

Start PERCENTAGE EVALUATION. Code type 

and length are displayed in the reading 

result. Enable recorded code type in the 

CODES section and disable all other 

types. Enter the code length under FIXED 

on the code type tab. Download to CLV! 

• Check: sufficient blank zones present 

Print contrast adequate Specified print 

tolerances exceeded 

In the "CLV-Setup" program: choose REA- 

DING CONFIGURATION tab, SEGMENTATION 

section. Is START/STOP selected Perform 

read with reference code. 

• See Chapter 8.5.2 Malfunctions in Reading 

mode: reading trigger errors, 

Page 8-11 

• Check wiring as shown in Fig. 5-2, 

Page 5-14 

• Measure voltages 

• In "CLV-Setup" program: choose HOST 

INTERFACE tab, DATA FORMAT section. Are 

the interface type (hardware) and data 

format correct Check settings in INTER- 

FACE PROTOCOL section. 

Switch the CLV off and on again. Does the 

"Device Ready" LED light up If not, contact 




Chapter 8 





4. The data content of the bar code output 

by the CLV is incorrect or incomplete 

• The data format on the host interface is 

parameterized incorrectly in the CLV 

• The CLV suppresses the last character in 

the bar code 


HOST INTERFACE tab, DATA FORMAT section. 

Are the values correct 


CODE CONFIGURATION tab. Click the EDIT 

CODES button. Choose the tab for the relevant 

code. Is the TRANSMIT CHECK DIGIT 

checkbox activated Change if necessary. 

Download to CLV! 


8.5.4 Malfunctions in Reading mode: errors in the result status output 

¾ 


If the LED does not light, see Table 8-5, Page 8-10 . 


The 

– "Result 1" 

(default setting: Device Ready) 


(default setting: Good Read) 


(default setting: No Read) 


(default setting: Match 1) 

switching outputs are not outputting any 

pulses 

• The event associated with the assigned 

function for outputting the result status of 

the read does not occur in the reading 

operation 

• Incorrect switching mode parameterized 

in the CLV 

Table 8-8: Troubleshooting: errors in the result status output in Reading mode 

• Not applicable. 


DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab. Click the EDIT 

RESULT OUTPUTS button. Are the outputs 

set to NO INVERT OUTPUT Change if necessary. 

Download to CLV! 





8.5.5 Malfunctions in Reading mode: oscillating mirror errors 

¾ 




1. The oscillating mirror does not move. Incorrect operating mode set on the CLV In the "CLV-Setup" program choose the 

OSCILLATING MIRROR tab, OSCILLATING MIRROR 

section. 

Is OSCILLATING WITH MAXIMUM AMPLITUDE or 

OSCILLATING WITH VARIABLE AMPLITUDE 

selected 

2. The oscillating mirror oscillates with 

maximum deflection (40 CW), even 

though a variable amplitude, e. g. 10 CW, 

is set in the distance configuration 1 

• OSCILLATING WITH MAXIMUM AMPLITUDE set 

on the CLV by mistake 

• The oscillating amplitude is paramterized 

in the wrong distance configuration 

(here: no. 2) 

• From the OSCILLATING MIRROR tab, choose 

OSCILLATING WITH VARIABLE AMPLITUDE. 



READING CONFIGURATION tab, click the DI- 

STANCE CONFIGURATION/ASSIGNMENT 

TABLE button. Is the amplitude value set in 

the correct distance configuration 

(here: no. 1) 

3. One-Shot: The One-Shot function cannot 

be triggered (sensor correctly connected 

to the "IN 3" or "IN 4" switching input) 

• The distance configuration (focus 

position) was not changed 

Trigger source incorrectly parameterized 

and/or "IN 3" or "IN 4" switching input has 

not been assigned this function. 


DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab. Assignment 

IN 3 and IN 4: is dynamic focus control 

selected Connect sensors to the switching 

inputs. Check sensor wiring (see 

Fig. 5-5, Page 5-17). Measure output 

signal at sensor 

In CLV-Setup: choose the OSCILLATING 

MIRROR tab. Trigger mode ok 

Choose DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab. Assignment 

IN 3 or IN 4: is trigger One-Shot selected 

Table 8-9: Troubleshooting: oscillating mirror errors in Reading mode 

8.6 SICK Support 

If a system error occurs repeatedly ( "CLVSYS-Failure: xxx", xxx= 000 ... 299) or if you 

cannot correct an error using the above measures, the CLV may be defective. The CLV does 

not contain any components that can be repaired by the user. 

Please contact your local SICK office or subsidiary. The telephone and fax numbers are listed 

on the back page of this manual. 

¾ Please contact SICK before sending the device for repair. 


Chapter 8 




Notes 




Technical data 

9 Technical data 

9.1 Data sheet CLV 490-0010/-2010/-6010 bar code scanner 

Type CLV 490-0010 

(Standard density) 

Design 

Reading window 

front 

Laser diode (wave length) 

red light (λ = 650 nm) 

Service life of laser diode 

MTBF 20 000 h 

CLV 490-2010 

(High density) 

line scanner (standard device), without heater 

CLV 490-6010 

(Low density) 

Laser class Class 2 (pursuant to DIN EN 60825-1), shutoff of laser diode after 10 min 1) 

Focus Control 

Autofocus, alternatively event-controlled focus control 

No. of distance configurations (DC) max. 8 

Focus adjustment time 

≤ 20 ms (typically) 

Focus trigger source 

"IN 0 ... IN 4" switching inputs/data interface/timer 

Useful aperture angle 

max. 60° (front reading window) 

Scanning/decoding frequency600 ... 1 200 Hz 

Resolution (typically) 0.25 ... 1.0 mm 0.17 ... 0.4 mm 0.35 ... 1.2 mm 

Reading ranges see Page 10-3 see Page 10-16 see Page 10-27 

Bar code print contrast (PCS) ≥ 60 % 

Ambient light compatibility 

2 000 lx (on bar code) 

No. of bar codes per scan 

1 ... 12 (standard decoder), 1 ... 5 (SMART decoder) 

No. of bar codes per reading interval 2) 1 ... 50 (autodiscriminating) 

Bar code types (SMART decoder) Code 39, Code 128, Code 93, Codabar, EAN, EAN 128, UPC, 2/5 Interleaved 

Bar code length 

max. 50 characters (max. 600 characters across all bar codes per reading interval) 

Print ratio 2:1 ... 3:1 

No. of multiple reads 1 ... 99 

Optical indicators 

4 x LEDs (status indicators) 

Reading pulse 

"Sensor" switching input/Free-running/Serial interface/OPC/OTC 

"Host" data interface 

RS 232 or RS 422/485, variable data output format 

Data transmission rate 

300 ... 57 600 bit/s 

Protocols 

SICK Standard, SICK Network and 3 964(R) 

Physical configurations 

Stand-alone, SICK Network (Bus), Daisy Chain (Pass-Through or Master/Slave) 

"CAN" data interface 

CANopen protocol, CAN scanner network 

Data transmission rate 

10 kbit/s ... 1 Mbit/s 

"Terminal" data interface 

RS 232, 9 600 bit/s, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, fixed output format 

Switching inputs 6 ( Sensor, "IN 0 ... IN 4") 

– optodecoupled, V imax = +30 V, non-interchangeable, can be connected to PNP outputs 

– "Sensor" (reading pulse): max. internal delay 30 ms, reduced max. 2 ... 6 ms 

– "IN 0 ... IN 4": focus position switching, IN 3 and IN 4: selectable function, 

max. internal delay 30 ms 

Switching outputs 4 ("Result 1" ... "Result 4") 

– PNP, short-circuit-proof, 

variable pulse duration (static; resolution 10... 990 ms or 100 ... 9 900 ms) 

– Variable output function for result status 

Electrical connections 

1 x 15-pin D Sub HD plug, 1 x 15-pin D Sub HD socket 

Operating voltage/power consumption 18 ... 30 V DC/ typically 9 W, max. 16 W 

Housing 

Aluminium die-cast, does not represent a problem in paint shops 

1) Default setting, in Reading mode with the "Switching input sensor" and "Serial interface pulse" types. 

2) Reading interval: time window generated internally for evaluating the code. 

Table 9-1: Technical specifications of the CLV 490-0010/-2010/-6010 


Chapter 9 




Type CLV 490-0010 


Enclosure rating/protection class IP 65 3) (to DIN 40 050)/class 3(to VDE 0106/IEC 1010-1) 

EMC/vibration/shock tested 

to EN 50081-1, 50082-2/IEC 68-2-6 Test FC/to IEC 68-2-27 Test EA 

Weight 

approx. 1.5 kg 

Ambient operating/storage temperature 0 ... +40 °C/–20 ... +70 °C 

Max. rel. humidity90 %, non condensing 

3) With plug cover or plug cover with parameter memory 


Type CLV 490-1010 


Design 


side 

CLV 490-2010 


CLV 490-6010 

(Low density) 


Technical data as CLV 490-0010/-2010/-6010 with the following exceptions: 

line scanner with oscillating mirror 

CLV 490-3010 


CLV 490-7010 

(Low density) 

Angle of emergence 105° (center position CW = 50) 

Trigger source for focus control 

also: oscillating mirror reversal points 

Useful aperture angle max. 50° 

Oscillating mirror functions permanent (variable position)/oscillating (amplitude per DC variable or fixed)/One-Shot 1) 

Oscillating frequency0.2 ... 4 Hz 

Max. angle of deflection 

max. ±20° (±40 CW), (set with software) 

Reading ranges see Page 10-9 see Page 10-21 see Page 10-31 

Deflection ranges see Page 10-15 see Page 10-26 seePage 10-33 

Operating voltage/power consumption 18 ... 30 V DC/ typically 9 W, max 18 W 

Weight 


1) One-Shot: one-off oscillating movement per reading pulse (start position and velocity can be selected for forward and return phase) 


9.3 Data sheet CLV 490-0011 /-2011/-6011 bar code scanner 


Type CLV 490-0011 


Design 

line scanner with heater 

CLV 490-2011 


CLV 490-6011 

(Low density) 

Switching on function/temperature graph see Chapter 10.4 Optional heating, Page 10-38 

Power-on delay35 ... 40 min (at 24 V DC and min. ambient operating temperature –35 °C) 

Operating voltage 24 V DC +20 %/–10 % 

Power consumption 

typically 75 W, max 90 W 

Required cross-section 

min. 0.5 mm 2 (for power supply) 

Weight 


Ambient operating/storage temperature –35 ... +35 °C/–20 ... +70 °C 






Type CLV 490-1011 


Design 



CLV 490-3011 


9.5 Dimensioned drawings – CLV 

9.5.1 Line scanner (standard device) without /with heater 

CLV 490-7011 

(Low density) 

line scanner with oscillating mirror and heater 

Switching on function/temperature graph see Chapter 10.4 Optional heating, Page 10-38 

Power-on delay35 ... 40 min (at 24 V DC and min. ambient operating temperature –35 °C) 

Operating voltage 24 V DC +20 %/–10 % 


typically 75 W, max 90 W 

Required cross-section 

min. 0.5 mm 2 (for power supply) 

Weight 


Ambient operating/storage temperature –35 ... +35 °C/–20 ... +70 °C 


Drilled hole, ∅ 3.6, 

6 mm deep 


7 mm deep 

CLV 490-0010 

10 

CLV 490-0011 

10 

CLV 490-2010 

10 

CLV 490-2011 

CLV 490-6010 

CLV 490-6011 

33.4 43.3 

56 

38.5 

12 

78 

21 

31 

26 37 

Device Ready 

Sensor 

Read Result 

Data 

60 ° 

117 

CLV490 

73.5 

117 

94 

All values in mm 

Fig. 9-1: 

Dimensions of the CLV 490 line scanner, front reading window 


Chapter 9 




9.5.2 Line scanner with oscillating mirror (without/with heater) 

CLV 490-1010 

CLV 490-1011 

CLV 490-3010 

CLV 490-3011 

CLV 490-7010 

CLV 490-7011 

Device Ready 

Sensor 

Read Result 

Data 

127,5 

max. 20° 

86 

21 78 

56 

43.3 

33.4 

25.5 

15° 

183 

70 

117 

Drilled hole, ∅ 3.6, 

6 mm deep 

2 

12 

38.5 

10 

82 

10 

10 

3.5 


7 mm deep 

CLV490 

50° 


Fig. 9-2: 

Dimensions of the CLV 490: line scanner with oscillating mirror, side reading window 




Appendix 

10 Appendix 

10.1 Overview 

The appendix contains the following additional information: 

• Specification diagrams 

– Line scanner (all variants) 

– Line scanner with oscillating mirror (all variants) 

• Installation and operating instructions for the external parameter memory 

• Optional heating (temperature graph/ switching on function) 

• System messages 

• Installation and operating instructions for the PC-based "CLV-Setup" program 

• Configuring a CLV using command strings 

• Parameter value calculations for configuring the CLV 

• Tables 

• Discussion of a parameterization example 

• Special applications and procedures 

• Instructions for replacing a CLV (copying the parameter set) 

• Accessories 

• Dimensioned drawings of the accessories 

• Notes on supplementary documentation 

• Glossary 

• Copy of the EC-Declaration of Conformity 

• Index 

• Scannable sample bar codes 

10.2 Specification diagrams 

10.2.1 Reading conditions for all diagrams 

Test code Code 128 

Print ratio > 90 % 

Tilt ±45° 

Ambient light 

< 2 000 lx 

Good Read rate > 75 % 

Table 10-1: Reading conditions for specification diagrams 

Note 

The min. and max. reading distances are measured radially by the CLV. 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



10.2.2 Overview of diagrams 

Line scanner 

CLV-Type Resolution Scanning method Diagram Page 

CLV 490-0010/-0011 Standard densityLine scanner Reading field height/resolution as a function of reading distance 10-3 

CLV 490-0010/-0011 Standard densityLine scanner Min. and max. reading distance (DOF) for 0.35 mm/40° 10-4 




CLV 490-0010/-0011 Standard densityLine scanner Characteristics field scanning frequency 10-8 

CLV 490-2010/-2011 High densityLine scanner Reading field height/resolution as a function of reading distance 10-16 

CLV 490-2010/-2011 High densityLine scanner Min. and max. reading distance (DOF) for 0.25 mm/40° 10-17 



CLV 490-2010/-2011 High densityLine scanner Characteristics field scanning frequency 10-20 

CLV 490-6010/-6011 Low densityLine scanner Reading field height/Tilt as a function of reading distance for 10-27 

0.5 mm 

CLV 490-6010/-6011 Low densityLine scanner Min. and max. reading distance (DOF) for 0.5 mm/40° 10-28 

CLV 490-6010/-6011 Low densityLine scanner Min. and max. reading distance (DOF) for 0.5 mm/60° 10-29 

CLV 490-6010/-6011 Low densityLine scanner Characteristics field scanning frequency 10-30 

Table 10-2: Overview of specification diagrams for the line scanner 


CLV-Type Resolution Scanning method Diagram Page 

CLV 490-1010/-1011 Standard densityL.s. with osci. mirror Reading field height/resolution as a function of reading 10-9 

distance 

CLV 490-1010/-1011 Standard densityL.s. with osci. mirror Min. and max. reading distance (DOF) for 0.35 mm/40° 10-10 

CLV 490-1010/-1011 Standard density L.s. with osci. mirror Min. and max. reading distance (DOF) for 0.35 mm/50° 10-11 



CLV 490-1010/-1011 Standard densityL.s. with osci. mirror Characteristics field scanning frequency 10-14 

CLV 490-1010/-1011 Standard densityL.s. with osci. mirror Deflection range 10-15 

CLV 490-3010/-3011 High densityL.s. with osci. mirror Reading field height/resolution as a function of reading 10-21 

distance 

CLV 490-3010/-3011 High densityL.s. with osci. mirror Min. and max. reading distance (DOF) for 0.25 mm/40° 10-22 



CLV 490-3010/-3011 High densityL.s. with osci. mirror Characteristics field scanning frequency 10-25 

CLV 490-3010/-3011 High densityL.s. with osci. mirror Deflection range 10-26 

CLV 490-7010/-7011 Low densityL.s. with osci. mirror Reading field height/Tilt as a function of reading distance for 10-31 

0.5 mm 

CLV 490-7010/-7011 Low densityL.s. with osci. mirror Min. and max. reading distance (DOF) for 0.5 mm/40° 10-28 

CLV 490-7010/-7011 Low densityL.s. with osci. mirror Min. and max. reading distance (DOF) for 0.5 mm/50° 10-29 

CLV 490-7010/-7011 Low densityL.s. with osci. mirror Characteristics field scanning frequency 10-32 

CLV 490-7010/-7011 Low densityL.s. with osci. mirror Deflection range 10-33 

Table 10-3: Overview of specification diagrams for the line scanner with oscillating mirror 




Appendix 

10.2.3 Standard density: Reading performance data of line scanner 

Line scanner (front reading window): 

CLV 490-0010/-0011 

Reading field height 

[mm] 

700 

600 

500 

400 

300 

200 

100 

0 

-100 

-200 

-300 

-400 

-500 

-600 

-700 

400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 

Reading distance [mm] 

Resolution: 

0.30 mm 

0.35 mm 

0.50 mm 

Characteristics field 

scanning frequency/ 

reading distance: 

see Fig. 10-6, 

Page 10-8 

Reading conditions: 

see Table 10-1, 

Page 10-1 

Aperture angle α = 40° 


Fig. 10-1: 

CLV 490-0010/-0011 (Standard density): Reading field height as a function of the reading distance and resolution 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



r 

Line scanner (front reading window): CLV 490-0010/-0011 


Resolution: 0.35 mm 

Aperture angle: 40° 

2200 

2100 

2000 

1900 

1800 

1700 

max. reading distance 

1600 

min. reading distance 

1500 

1400 

1300 

1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

Reading ranges from approx. 1 540 mm 

focus position are typical values! 

700 

600 

500 

400 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 

Characteristics field scanning frequency/ 

reading distance: see Fig. 10-6, Page 10-8 


see Table10-1, Page10-1 

Focus position [mm] 

Fig. 10-2: 

CLV 490-0010/-0011 (Standard density): Min. and Max. reading distance (measured radially) as a function of the focus 

position at a resolution of 0.35 mm and an aperture angle of α =40° 




Appendix 





2200 

2100 

2000 

1900 

1800 

1700 

1600 

1500 


1400 

1300 


1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

500 

400 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 






Fig. 10-3: 




Chapter 10 

Appendix 







2200 

2100 


2000 

1900 

min. 

reading distance 

1800 

1700 

1600 

1500 

1400 

1300 

1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

500 

400 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 





see Table10-1, Page10-1 

Fig. 10-4: 






Appendix 





2200 

2100 

2000 

1900 

1800 

1700 

1600 


1500 

1400 

1300 

1200 


1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

500 

400 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 






Fig. 10-5: 




Chapter 10 

Appendix 




Scanning frequency [Hz] 

1300 

1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 


Resolution: 

0.35 mm 

0.50 mm 



Fig. 10-6: 

Characteristics field CLV 490-0010/-0011: Scanning frequency as a function of the reading distance and resolution 




Appendix 

10.2.4 Standard density: Reading performance data of line scanner with 


Line scanner with oscillating mirror (side reading window): 

CLV 490-1010/-1011 


[mm] 

700 

600 

500 

400 

300 

200 

100 

0 

-100 

-200 

-300 

-400 

-500 

-600 

-700 

400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 


Resolution: 

0.30 mm 

0.35 mm 

0.50 mm 

Characteristics field 

scanning frequency/ 

reading distance: 

see Fig. 10-12, 

Page 10-14 



Page 10-1 



Fig. 10-7: 

CLV 490-1010/-1011 (Standard density): Reading field height as a function of the reading distance and resolution 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



Line scanner with oscillating mirror (side reading window): CLV 490-1010/-1011 




2200 

2100 

2000 

1900 

1800 

1700 


1600 


1500 

1400 

1300 

1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 


focus position are typical values! 

500 

400 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 






Fig. 10-8: 






Appendix 



2200 



2100 

2000 

1900 

1800 

1700 

1600 

1500 


1400 

1300 


1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

500 

400 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 






Fig. 10-9: 




Chapter 10 

Appendix 





2200 

2100 



max. 


2000 

1900 

1800 

1700 

1600 

min. 


1500 

1400 

1300 

1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

500 

400 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 






Fig. 10-10: CLV 490-1010/-1011 (Standard density): Min. and Max. reading distance (measured radially) as a function of the focus 





Appendix 





2200 

2100 

2000 

1900 

1800 

1700 

1600 

1500 


1400 

1300 


1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

500 

400 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 






Fig. 10-11: CLV 490-1010/-1011 (Standard density): Min. and Max. reading distance (measured radially) as a function of the focus 



Chapter 10 

Appendix 





1300 

1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 


Resolution: 

0.35 mm 

0.50 mm 



Fig. 10-12: Characteristics field CLV 490-1010/-1011: Scanning frequency as a function of the reading distance and resolution 




Appendix 


Deflection range 

[mm] 

1600 

Deflection angle ±20° 


1200 

800 

0.50 mm 

0.35 mm 

0.30 mm 


400 

0 

-400 

-400 0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 


Resolution: 

0.30 mm 

0.35 mm 

0.50 mm 



Fig. 10-13: CLV 490-1010/-1011 (Standard density): deflection range as a function of reading distance, deflection angle and 

resolution 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



10.2.5 High density: Reading performance data of line scanner 



[mm] 

600 

500 

400 

300 

200 

100 

0 

-100 

-200 

-300 

-400 

-500 

-600 

400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 


Resolution: 

0.20 mm 

0.25 mm 

0.30 mm 

Characteristics field scanning 

frequency/reading distance: 

see Fig. 10-18, Page 10-20 



Page 10-1 



Fig. 10-14: CLV 490-2010/-2011 (High density): Reading field height as a function of the reading distance and resolution 




Appendix 



2200 



2100 

2000 

1900 

1800 

Resolution 0.2 mm: 

Depth of field reduced by 20 % compared 

to depth of field at resolution 0.25 mm 

(typical values) 

1700 

1600 

1500 


1400 

1300 


1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

Reading ranges typical values! 

500 

400 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 



reading distance: see Table 10-18, Page 10-20 



Fig. 10-15: CLV 490-2010/-2011 (High density): Min. and Max. reading distance (measured radially) as a function of the focus 



Chapter 10 

Appendix 







2200 

2100 

2000 

1900 

1800 

1700 


1600 


1500 

1400 

1300 

1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 


focus position are typical values 

700 

600 

500 

400 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 











Appendix 



2200 



2100 

2000 

1900 

1800 

1700 

1600 

1500 


1400 

1300 


1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

500 

400 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 









Chapter 10 

Appendix 





1300 

1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 


Resolution: 

0.20 mm 

0.25 mm 

0.30 mm 







Appendix 

10.2.6 High density: Reading performance data line scanner with oscillating mirror 

Line scanner oscillating mirror (side reading window): CLV 490-3010/-3011 


[mm] 

600 

500 

400 

300 

200 

100 

0 

-100 

-200 

-300 

-400 

-500 

-600 

400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 


Resolution: 

0.20 mm 

0.25 mm 

0.30 mm 



see Fig. 10-23, Page 10-25 



Page 10-1 



Fig. 10-19: CLV 490-3010/-3011 (High density): Reading field height as a function of the reading distance and resolution 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 







2200 

2100 

2000 

1900 

1800 

1700 

1600 

1500 


1400 

1300 


1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

Reading ranges typical values! 

600 

500 

400 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 






Fig. 10-20: CLV 490-3010/-3011: (High density) Min. and Max. reading distance (measured radially) as a function of the focus 





Appendix 



2200 



2100 

2000 

1900 

1800 

1700 


1600 

1500 


1400 

1300 

1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 


focus position are typical values 

600 

500 

400 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 









Chapter 10 

Appendix 







2200 

2100 

2000 

1900 

1800 

1700 

1600 

1500 

1400 


1300 


1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

500 

400 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 











Appendix 



1300 

1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 


Resolution: 

0.20 mm 

0.25 mm 

0.30 mm 





Chapter 10 

Appendix 





[mm] 

1600 


1200 



800 

400 

0.30 mm 

0.25 mm 

0.20 mm 

0 

-400 

-400 0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 


Resolution: 

0.20 mm 

0.25 mm 

0.30 mm 



Fig. 10-24: CLV 490-3010/-3011: Deflection range as a function of reading distance, deflection angle and resolution 




Appendix 

10.2.7 Low density: Reading performance data of line scanner 



[mm] 

900 

800 

700 

600 

500 

400 

300 

200 

100 

0 

-100 

-200 

-300 

-400 

-500 

-600 

-700 

-800 

-900 

400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 



Tilt 

–45° ... +45° 

–30° ... +30° 

–15° ... +15° (typical values!) 



see Fig. 10-28, Page 10-30 



Page 10-1 



Fig. 10-25: CLV 490-6010/-6011 (Low density): Reading field height as a function of the reading distance and the tilt at a resolution of 

0.5 mm 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 







2200 

2100 

2000 

1900 

CLV 490-7010/-7011: 

Max. reading distance for 0.5 mm/40° reduced by 

25 % compared to max. reading distance for 

CLV 490-6010/6011 

1800 

1700 

1600 


1500 

1400 

1300 

1200 


1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

500 

400 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 






Fig. 10-26: CLV 490-6010/-6011 (Low density): Min. and Max. reading distance (measured radially) as a function of the focus position 

at a resolution of 0.5 mm and an aperture angle of α =40° 




Appendix 



2200 



2100 

2000 

1900 

CLV 490-7010/-7011: 

Max. reading distance for 0.5 mm/50° reduced 

by 25 % compared to max. reading distance for 

CLV 490-6010/6011 

1800 

1700 

1600 

1500 

1400 


1300 

1200 

1100 


1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

500 

400 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 






Fig. 10-27: CLV 490-6010/-6011 (Low density): Min. and Max. reading distance (measured radially) as a function of the focus position 

at a resolution of 0.5 mm and an aperture angle of α =60° 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 





1300 

1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 


Resolution: 

0.50 mm 







Appendix 

10.2.8 Low density: Reading performance data of line scanner with 




[mm] 

900 

800 

700 

600 

500 

400 

300 

200 

100 

0 

-100 

-200 

-300 

-400 

-500 

-600 

-700 

-800 

-900 


400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 


Tilt 

–45° ... +45° 

–30° ... +30° 

–15° ...+15° (typical values!) 



see Fig. 10-30, Page 10-32 



Page 10-1 



Fig. 10-29: CLV 490-7010/-7011 (Low density): Reading field height as a function of the reading distance and tilt at a resolution of 

0.5 mm 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



Reading distance at a resolution of 0.5 mm/aperature angle 40° 

see Fig. 10-26, Page 10-28 

Reading distance at a resolution of 0.5 mm/aperature angle 50° 

see Fig. 10-27, Page 10-29 



1300 

1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 


Resolution: 

0.50 mm 







Appendix 



[mm] 

1600 


1200 

800 

-15 ... +15 

-30 ... +30 

-45 ... +45 



400 

0 

-400 

-400 0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 


Tilt: 

–45° ... +45° 


–30° ... +30° 

–15° ...+15° 



Fig. 10-31: CLV 490-7010/-7011: Deflection range as a function of reading distance, deflection angle and tilt at a resolution of 

0.5 mm 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



10.3 Installing and operating the external parameter memory 

The external parameter memory is available as an accessory. It is located in a connector 

cover and comprises a permanent, rewriteable memory (EEPROM). The connector cover covers 

the two connections of the CLV in the enclosure rating IP 65. The cover is shown in 

Fig. 10-32. Two connection cables that are secured by means of conduit thread connections 

supply the signals to the CLV. 

22 22 

88.5 

50 

27 

27 

Fig. 10-32: External parameter memory, installed on the CLV 

The external parameter memory is available in different implementations: 

Order no. Two Connection cables with CLV Length Connection 

2 020 307 Two 15-pin D Sub HD plug connections 

(pin assignment identical to device connections) 

Without heater 3 m CLV to AMV/S 60 

AMV 30-071 and BMV 10 

2 020 981 Two open cable ends Without heater 3 m CLV to non-Sick Power pack, free wiring 

2 020 308 One 9-pin D Sub cable connector and one Without heater 3 m CLV to BMS 20 

open cable end 

2 021 689 Two 15-pin D Sub HD plug connections, 

(pin assignment identical to device connections) 

With heater 3 m CLV to AMV 100/200 

Table 10-4: External parameter memory 

10.3.1 Function 

When it is started, the CLV is initialized with the data stored in its internal parameter set. If 

this parameter set has been copied to an external memory, the device can be replaced easily. 

The replacement device, therefore, does not have to be configured manually. Instead, it 

accesses the external parameter memory automatically (assuming that the correct start 

option has been selected). It then imports the parameter set to its RAM. This option is set 

by default. The "Device Ready" and "Read Result" LEDs indicate whether the external memory 

was accessed successfully. The CLV also outputs plain-text messages for troubleshooting 

purposes on the terminal interface. 




Appendix 

10.3.2 Installation and electrical connection 

The pin assignments for the connection cables of the parameter memory no. 2 020 307/ 

no. 2 021 689 are shown in Table 5-5 and Table 5-6, Page 5-7. 

¾ 

Mount the parameter memory on the CLV as shown in Chapter 5.5.3 Connecting the 

supply voltage, Page 5-13 and connect the cables to the AMV/S 60 Connection Module. 

The color assignment of the wiring for the open ends of the connection cables for the 

parameter memory no. 2 020 981 is shown in Table 5-12 and Table5-13, Page5-11. 

¾ 

Mount the parameter memory on the CLV as shown in Chapter 5.5.3 Connecting the 

supply voltage, Page 5-13 and connect the cables to the external power supply. 

10.3.3 Operation 

The parameter memory connected to the CLV is accessed 

• using the selected CLV start option 

• after the parameters have been downloaded to the CLV with the permanent storage 

function and the START WITH EXTERNAL PARAMETERS option 

The start option is set at the bottom right of the DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab as shown in 

Fig. 10-33 (white frame). The START WITH EXTERNAL PARAMETERS option is selected by default. 

Fig. 10-33: CLV-Setup: "Device configuration" tab with the CLV start options 

Start with internal parameters 

When it starts, the CLV loads the internal parameter set to its RAM. 

The "Device Ready" LED lights up constantly. 

Since the data is stored permanently, it is not lost when the device is switched off. 

Start with external parameters (default setting) 

When it starts, the CLV loads the external parameter set to its RAM. 

The "Device Ready" LED blinks for approx. 10 s and then lights up constantly. 

The data in the CLV is lost when the device is switched off. 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



Start with copy internal -> external 

When it starts, the CLV loads the internal parameter set to its RAM. It then copies the parameter 

set to the external memory and resets the start option to START WITH EXTERNAL PARA- 

METERS. 

The two "Device Ready" and "Read Result" LEDs blink alternately for approx. 10 s. The "Device 

Ready" LED then lights up constantly. 

The data is not lost when the device is switched off since it is stored permanently in the CLV 

and is identical to the internal parameter set. 

10.3.4 Switching on the device for the first time 

Since the external parameter memory is empty on delivery, the "Device Ready" and "Read 

Result" LEDs blink constantly when the device is switched on for the first time with the default 

setting (START WITH EXTERNAL PARAMETER). The CLV has not found an external 

parameter set and has loaded the internal parameter set. However, it is not ready for 

operation and does not output data on the host interface. 

¾ 

Transfer the CLV parameter set to the parameter memory for the first time as described 

in Chapter 6.3.2 Switching the CLV with external parameter memory connected on for 

the first time with the factory default settings, Page 6-4. 

10.3.5 Adjusting the parameter set in the external parameter memory after it has 

been downloaded to the CLV 

If the CLV is started with the START WITH EXTERNAL PARAMETERS option with an external parameter 

memory and if the parameter set is downloaded from CLV-Setup to the CLV with the 

permanent storage option, CLV-Setup asks you whether the new parameter set is also to 

be copied to the external parameter memory (Fig. 10-34). This function prevents the CLV 

from reloading the old parameter set the next time it starts. 

Fig. 10-34: CLV-Setup: dialog box for adjusting the external parameter memory 

¾ 

Adjust the parameter set in the external parameter memory as described in 

Chapter 6.4.1 Configuring the CLV via the user interface of CLV-Setup, Page 6-5 




Appendix 

10.3.6 Meaning of the LEDs 

The function of the two "Device Ready" and "Read Result" LEDs, as defined by the selected 

start option, is shown in Table 3-3, Page 3-10. Their function in the event of an error accessing 

the external memory as well as troubleshooting measures are described in Table 8-2, 

Page 8-5. 

10.3.7 Error messages 

If errors occur accessing the external parameter memory, the CLV outputs error messages 

on the terminal interface. When the CLV is started, these messages can be displayed using 

the "CLV-Setup" program. 

1. Connect the PC to the terminal interface on the CLV using an RS 232 cable (AMV/S 60: 

connect the PC to the internal 9-pin Service plug). See Chapter 5.5.5 Connecting the 

CAN interface, Page 5-15. 

2. Switch on the PC and start Windows. 

3. Start the "CLV-Setup" program and open the Terminal Emulator. 

4. Choose the extended display mode. 

5. Switch on the power supply for the AMV/S 60. 

The CLV starts and loads the parameter set from the external memory. 

6. Monitor the messages in the main window of the Terminal Emulator. 

Table 8-3, Page 8-7 lists the error messages in alphabetical order with the appropriate troubleshooting 

measures. 

10.3.8 Replacing a CLV 

The device is replaced by starting the new CLV with the START WITH EXTERNAL PARAMETERS option 

(default). This is the case when the device is put into service for the first time, e. g. when 

it is taken from the warehouse. The device must be replaced with a device of the same type. 

You do not need to connect a PC to replace the device. 

¾ 

Replace the device as described in Chapter 10.12.2 Importing the parameter set from 

the external memory, Page 10-70. 

The CLV imports the external parameter set into the RAM. This is sufficient to ensure that 

the device operates correctly. If the parameter set is to be stored permanently in the CLV 

(EEPROM), a PC with the "CLV-Setup" program must be connected to upload the parameter 

set from the CLV to CLV-Setup and then download it again to the CLV with the PERMANENT 

storage option. When asked to do so, adjust the external memory again. 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



10.4 Optional heating 

10.4.1 Features 

• Integrated heater (permanently installed) 

• Wider range of applications for CLV: up to max. –35 °C 

• Supply voltage 24 V DC +20 %/–10 % 

• CLV enabled via internal temperature switch (power-up delay approx. 35 ... 40 min. at 

24 V DC and min. ambient temperature of –35 °C) 

• Required cable cross-section (power supply): min. 0.75 mm 2 

10.4.2 Design 

The heating system comprises two parts: 

• the front window heater 

• the housing heater 

The optional heating system is installed and tested at the factory. The user cannot install it 

on site. 

10.4.3 Function 

When the 24 V DC supply voltage is applied, a temperature switch first supplies electric 

current to the heater only. This switch enables the supply voltage for the CLV when the internal 

temperature rises above 7 °C during the warm-up phase (approx. 35 min). The device 

then performs a self-test and switches to Reading mode. The "Device Ready" LED lights up 

to indicate that the device is ready. 

When the internal temperature has reached approx. 25 °C, a further temperature switch 

deactivates the housing heater and reactivates it if necessary. Reading mode is not interrupted 

as a result. The front window heater remains active constantly. The temperature curve 

inside the housing is shown in Fig. 10-35. 

Temperature 

inside housing 

[°C] 

The temperature enables the operating 

voltage for the CLV internally 

Time [min] 

Fig. 10-35: CLV with heater: temperature curve inside the housing 




Appendix 

10.4.4 Electrical installation 

Cable cross-section 

The connection cables for the power supply must have a cross-section of at least 

0.75 mm 2 . 

See also Chapter 5.4.2 Supply voltage, Page 5-8. 


The power consumption depends on the variant: 

• Line scanner with heater: typically 75 W and max. 90 W 

• Line scanner with oscillating mirror and heater: typically 75 W and max. 100 W 

These values apply to operation without the switching outputs connected. 

AMV/S 60 Connection Module 

The AMV/S 60 Connection Module is not suitable to power the CLV with heater. An external 

power supply pack with a higher power output should be used for this purpose. 

See Chapter 3.1.3 System requirements, Page 3-2. 

10.4.5 Outdoor applications 

If the CLV with integrated heater is used outdoors, it should be installed in a protective housing 

to prevent the front window from being damaged by rain, snow, or dust. The housing 

also acts as a wind protector. 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



10.5 System messages 

The CLV outputs all system messages in plain text on the terminal interface. The messages 

are in English and can be displayed in the extended Terminal Emulator mode in the "CLV- 

Setup" program. 

See also Chapter 6.6.1 Displaying messages, Page 6-33. 

10.5.1 CLV without external parameter memory 

Message Meaning 

"CLV 490 

Soft.Vers. Vx.xx 

Aend. Nr. 0000 

CLV 490/OTS" 

"internal parameters loaded" 

"laser safety timeout" 

"no code" 

"No ext. parameter memory connected" 

The software version and revision is displayed when the power 

supply is switched on. 

When the CLV is started, it imports the parameter set that was last 

stored permanently in the internal EEPROM to the RAM 

The CLV has shut off the laser diode 10 minutes (default setting) 

after a reading pulse has begun. The reading interval is still active, 

even though the CLV is no longer reading. The reading interval has 

to be terminated by a corresponding pulse signal. The laser diode 

is activated again with the next reading pulse. 

In Reading/Percentage Evaluation mode, the CLV indicates that no 

codes matching the parameterized evaluation conditions were 

detected during the reading interval (error status ST = 2 output on 

the host interface). 

No external parameter memory was connected to the CLV when it 

was started. 

Table 10-5: CLV system messages 

10.5.2 CLV with external parameter memory connected 

In addition to the messages above, the CLV also indicates whether it was able to access the 

external parameter memory 

Message 

Meaning 

"diff. SW version of parameters" When the CLV was started, the software version of the parameter 

set in the external memory was different from that in the CLV. The 

parameter set is still transferred. 

"external parameters loaded" When the CLV was started, the external parameter set was 

imported successfully to the RAM. 

"internal parameters copied to 

external memory" 

When the CLV was started, the internal parameter set was 

successfully copied to the external parameter memory. 

Table 10-6: Additional CLV system messages for the connected parameter memory 




Appendix 

10.6 Installing and operating the "CLV-Setup" program 

The scope of delivery of the CLV includes a CD-ROM containing the "CLV-Setup" program. 

The software can be installed on a PC with the following minimum configuration: 80486 processor, 

66 MHz, and 16 MB RAM, CD drive, serial interface and mouse (recommended) as 

well as an operating system Windows 95 TM /98 TM , Windows NT TM or Windows NT TM . Approximately 

26 MB of hard disk space is required to install CLV-Setup, CLV Assistant, CLV-Setup 

Help, and I-ViewPro TM offline browser. 

10.6.1 Preparations 

1. Make sure you have the CD-ROM at hand. 

2. Connect the CLV to the AMV/S 60 Connection Module (see Chapter 5.5.3 Connecting 

the supply voltage, Page 5-13). 

3. Connect the PC to the terminal interface on the CLV using an RS 232 cable 

(AMV/S 60: connect the PC to the internal 9-pin "Service" plug). 

See Chapter 5.5.5 Connecting the CAN interface, Page 5-15. 


Once the CLV has started, the "Device Ready" LED lights up. 


10.6.2 Installing the software 

The "CLV-Setup" installation program creates a directory "CLV", a series of subdirectories, 

and the necessary links. A deinstaller is also installed automatically so that you can remove 

the program from the PC at any time. As of version V 2.6, CLV-Setup will only be available 

and further developed as a 32-bit application. 

Initial installation 

1. Close all Windows applications. 

2. Insert CD-ROM in CD-drive. 

3. Choose RUN in Windows. 

In the OPEN drop-down list, enter: "X:\setup.exe" (X = destination of drive). 

Confirm the dialog box with OK. 

– or – 

Open Windows Explorer, open the CD-ROM drive and double click on the "setup.exe" 

file. 

The installation program is started and guides you step by step through the installation 

procedure. The program asks you for your user name and company name. This information 

appears as a header in printouts. The "CLV-Setup" software, CLV Assistant and 

the CLV-Setup Help online help are installed according to the selected configuration. 

4. Install the I-ViewPro TM HTML browser if necessary (the system asks you whether you 

want to do so). If you choose not to install I-ViewPro TM , the system searches your hard 

disk for the Netscape Navigator TM and uses it to display the CLV-Setup Help. 

5. Read the Readme file that contains the latest information and problems regarding CLV- 

Setup. 

6. Then confirm the installation message by clicking OK. 

7. Restart the PC. 

The Windows DLL files are possibly updated. 

The "CLV-Setup" program and CLV-Setup Help are installed and ready. 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



The program logs all of the files that are installed to the "install.log file". This list is used by 

the deinstaller to remove the program and must not be deleted if you want to use the 

deinstaller at some time in the future. 

Updating the program 

There are two ways of installing a new version of CLV-Setup: 

• You can install the new version and still keep the old version (parallel installation) 

– or – 

• You can install the new version over the old version (overwrite) 

Installing the new version while still keeping the old one 

If you want to install the new version and still keep the old version of CLV-Setup, follow the 

procedure described under Initial installation. When the program asks you for the target 

directory, you must specify a new directory. Both versions of the software are then available 

but must not be started simultaneously. The configuration files "*.scl " of the old version can 

be used in the new version and contain the CLV parameter sets. In order to do so, copy the 

configuration files from the "data" directory of the old version to the "data" directory of the 

new version. 

Installing the new version over the old one 

Before you can install the new version of the software, you must remove the files of the old 

version – with the exception of the configuration files "*.scl", which contain the CLV parameter 

sets. 

The deinstaller of the old version removes the program files. You can use the deinstaller to 

remove all of the files (with the exception of the configuration files) or only selected files. The 

default setting is a complete deinstallation (the configuration files are not deleted). With the 

custom deinstallation, the files are listed and only selected files are deinstalled. If you choose 

this deinstallation method, make sure that the main directory containing the configuration 

files "*.scl" is not deleted. We recommend that you move these files to a different directory 

and copy them back to the "data" directory later. 

1. From the Windows Start menu, choose PROGRAMS and the deinstaller for CLV-Setup. The 

deinstaller starts and guides you step by step through the deinstallation procedure. 

2. Choose the deinstallation method (complete or custom). 

3. Install the new version of CLV-Setup as described under Initial installation, making sure 

to choose the same directory. 

The new version of CLV-Setup is installed. The configuration files of the old version can be 

used again. 




Appendix 

10.6.3 Starting CLV-Setup 

The "CLV-Setup" program is launched with the following default settings: 

Communication 

Transmit control character 

Receive control character 

Unit of measure 

Browser 

Language 

Company name 

User name 

Automatic connection to CLV 

Initial screen 

Storage confirmation prompt 

Last type selected 

File storage location 

COM 1, 9 600 bit/s, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity 

Start: STX, Stop: ETX 

Start: STX, Stop: ETX 

Metric (depending on the selected installation) 

I-ViewPro TM (if installed), alternatively Netscape Navigator TM 

As selected for the installation 

As entered for the installation 

As entered for the installation 

On startup: yes 

On scanner selection: yes 

When the Terminal Emulator is started/closed: yes 

Yes 

Yes 

CLV 41x 

"data" (configuration files for CLV) 

Table 10-7: Default settings in CLV-Setup 


2. Choose CLV-SETUP from the Start menu. 

The SICK logo is then followed by the initial screen. 

3. Confirm the initial screen. 

CLV-Setup then checks whether a CLV is connected to the COM 1 port on the PC (default 

setting in CLV-Setup) and whether the communication parameters on the PC 

match those on the CLV. If this is the case, the CONNECTED status is displayed with the 

CLV specification in the status bar right in the bottom of the screen. The CLV type (here: 

CLV 490) is displayed in the DEVICE drop-down list in the top right of the toolbar. 

The program then loads the internal description of the CLV as well as the default parameter 

values and displays them on the tabs. Finally, CLV-Setup uploads the current parameter set 

from the RAM of the CLV and displays the values on the tabs instead of the default values. 

You can edit the current parameter set on the tabs. The default values are displayed when 

the device is used for the first time. 


If the program cannot establish communication, it outputs a timeout warning and displays 

NO CONNECTION in the status field. This may be because the CLV is not connected or because 

the communication parameters on the CLV do not match those on the PC. In this case, CLV- 

Setup enters the CLV type of the device it last communicated with in the DEVICE field on the 

toolbar. The default setting the first time the device is used is the CLV 41x. The software 

then loads the internal device description for this CLV type and displays the default values 

on the tabs. 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



1. Connect the PC to the terminal interface on the CLV using a RS 232 cable (AMV/S 60: 

connect the PC to the internal 9-pin "Service" plug). 


2. Click (AutoBaud detect) in the toolbar or choose OPTIONS, AUTOBAUD DETECT. 

CLV-Setup scans the serial interface by varying the communication parameters and 

sends a telegram to the CLV repeatedly. As soon as a response is registered from the 

CLV, CLV-Setup signals the detected communication parameters. Fig. 10-36 shows an 

example of the results of the AutoBaud detect function. The CONNECTED status is displayed 

right in the status bar in the bottom of the screen. 

3. Confirm the AUTO DETECT dialog box with OK. 

CLV-Setup displays the detected CLV type in a separate dialog box and asks you 

whether you want to upload the current parameter set from the CLV. 

4. Confirm the dialog box with Yes. 

CLV-Setup uploads the current parameter set from the RAM of the CLV to its database 

and displays the values on the tabs. 

You can edit the current parameter set on the tabs. 

Fig. 10-36: CLV-Setup: Result display of the AutoBaud Detect function 

– or– 

2. Choose OPTIONS, SERIAL INTERFACE from the menu bar. 

CLV-Setup displays the current communication parameter settings on the PC in the 

COM PARAMETERS dialog box. 

3. Make sure that the communication parameters on the PC and CLV are identical 

(connected COM port, 9 600 bit/s, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity) 


CLV-Setup attempts to communicate with the CLV again. 

If it is successful, it displays the CONNECTED status right in the status bar in the bottom 

of the screen. 


CLV-Setup then uploads the current parameter set from the RAM of the CLV to its 

database and displays the values on the tabs. 

You can edit the current parameter set on the tabs. 




Appendix 

10.6.4 User interface 

The graphical user interface (GUI) of the CLV-Setup is largely self explanatory. The online 

CLV-Setup Help function provides a description of how to use the program under HELP , PRO- 

GRAMM INFORMATION. The GUI is shown in Fig. 10-37 below (V 3.1). 

The GUI comprises the following elements: 

• Title bar that displays the program name, current configuration file, and its status, e. g. 

No File 

• Menu bar with pull-down menus 

• Toolbar with buttons for triggering various functions 

• Drop-down list (top right) for selecting the device type 

• Up to 9 tabs (reading configuration, device configuration etc.). The parameters on the 

tabs are grouped according to their function. Some of these parameters open further 

dialog boxes. 

• Status bar (bottom) with two display fields for the communication between CLV-Setup 

and the CLV, the PC’s interface parameter display, error display field (system errors), 

device specification field and status display for the connection to the CLV. 

Fig. 10-37: User interface of the "CLV-Setup" software 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



10.6.5 Functions 

The "CLV-Setup" program features (version V 3.0 and above) the following function to carry 

out the following: 

• Upload the default parameter set from the database 

• Automatic communication attempt with the CLV when the program is started 

• Automatic software compatibility check in the CLV 

• Upload parameter set stored in the CLV 

• Change the values on the tabs 

• Save the changes to the parameter set in the CLV (download) 

• Save the changes to the parameter set as a configuration file "*.scl" 

• Print the configuration files 

• Export the configuration files in RTF format 

• Direct access to the CLV via a Terminal Emulator (select operating mode, start 

operating functions, log file for communication between the CLV and CLV-Setup, 

extended Terminal mode, e. g. for displaying CLV messages) 

• AutoBaud Detect for automatic communication setup with the CLV 

• Select the COM port for adapting the data transfer parameters 

• Observation monitor for the CLV host interface’s data communication 

• Select language setting 

• Select units of measure 

• Display the last 10 configuration files that were processed 

• Save the CLV type that was selected last 

• Automatic storage confirmation prompt when changes are made to the configuration file 

• Wizards for individual functions 

• CLV 490 only: Aligment check to calculate the required setting for angles 

• CLV 490 only: Background analysis 

• Set switches for starting the program (in the "CLVmain.ini" file) 

• Hot keys [F keys] for important functions (using the program without a mouse) 

• Start program with SCL file as argument 

• Context-sensitive help via the [F1] key 

10.6.6 CLV-Setup Help 

The procedure for setting the CLV parameters is supported by the online help function, 

which is displayed in an HTML browser, such as Netscape TM , Internet Explorer TM , or the 

I-View Pro TM browser supplied with the program. You can call up context-sensitive help on 

each parameter as well as a description of its function and permissible values. 

1. Press the [F1] key. 

The browser is launched automatically and displays the help topic. 

2. If the program cannot find a browser, it asks you to specify the storage location on the 

hard disk. 

Enter the name of the executable file and the path in the dialog box 

(e. g. "Iviewpro32.exe" in the "Iview" directory). 

3. Use the [ALT]+[TAB] keys to switch between the CLV-Setup and CLV-Setup Help 

applications and prevent several browser windows from being opened. 

4. To display an overview of the Help function, Choose HELP, CONTENTS from the CLV-Setup 

menu bar. 




Appendix 

5. To display information on a tab, click the tab in the top, horizontal frame. The vertical 

frame on the left-hand side of the screen then displays a list of parameters. 

6. Click on a parameter in the list for a description. 

CLV-Setup Help then displays the associated help text in the right-hand frame and 

jumps to the parameter heading. 

10.6.7 Transferring parameter sets between CLV-Setup and the CLV 

See Chapter 6.4.1 Configuring the CLV via the user interface of CLV-Setup, Page 6-5. 

10.6.8 Unknown parameters 

Uploading from the CLV 

If CLV-Setup does not recognize certain parameters or parameter values when it uploads 

them from the CLV, it outputs a warning. This may be due to the fact that the CLV is a special 

model or because the version of CLV-Setup is older than the version on the CLV. CLV-Setup 

displays the unknown parameters in the window on the EXTRAS tab. The parameters are displayed 

in the form of command strings and can be edited using the command string 

conventions. In this way, upward compatibility with the CLV is ensured. When the parameter 

set is saved as a configuration file in CLV-Setup, these parameters are also included and 

are also downloaded to the CLV. 

Downloading to the CLV 

If the CLV does not accept individual parameters or parameter values in the parameter set 

downloaded with CLV-Setup, it outputs a separate warning for each parameter on the 

screen. This could be due to the fact that the version of the "CLV-Setup" software is newer 

than the software version on the CLV and therefore contains new parameters and parameter 

values that are not implemented in the older software version. 

We recommend that you check the effects of warnings in the CLV as follows: 

1. Check whether the CLV functions correctly after the parameter set is downloaded. 


CLV-Setup loads the default settings from the database. 


CLV-Setup uploads the problem parameter set from the CLV. 


CLV-Setup prints out the problem parameter set when you confirm the dialog box. 

5. Open the previous configuration file "*.scl" for the CLV. 


CLV-Setup prints out the parameter set used up to now when you confirm the dialog 

box. 

7. Compare the two parameter sets. 

To restore the previous status, correct individual parameters in the problem parameter 

set if necessary and download them to the CLV again. 

Opening configuration files "*.scl" 

Every time it loads configuration files, CLV-Setup checks whether it recognizes all the parameters/values. 

If the program detects an error, it outputs a warning and enters the problem parameter/ 

value in the window on the EXTRAS tab. 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



10.6.9 Log file in the Terminal Emulator 

The Terminal Emulator can log the communication between CLV-Setup and the CLV. 

CLV-Setup stores the data transmitted in both directions with the following identifiers: 

--> PC: CLV sending to CLV-Setup 

PC --> CLV receiving from CLV-Setup 


The Terminal Emulator window opens. 

2. Click the empty checkbox in front of the WRITE LOGFILE option on the right. 

The SAVE LOGFILE AS ... dialog box opens. 

3. Enter a file name with the extension ".log" and exit the window by choosing SAVE. 

CLV-Setup saves the file in the "data" directory and records an entry in the log file. 

4. To deactivate the log function, click the checkbox in front of the WRITE LOGFILE option 

again or close the Terminal Emulator window. 

10.6.10 Starting CLV-Setup with an "INI file" as an argument 

When the program is started, CLV-Setup can also be transferred the name of an "INI file" as 

a parameter. To do so, enter "/INI" in front of the file. 

Example: 

"CLVmain32.exe\data\Set1_490.scl /INI user.ini " 

CLV-Setup is launched with the initialization data contained in the "user.ini" file and loads the 

configuration file "Set1_490.scl" from the "data" directory straight away. 

The "user.ini" file must be stored in the same directory as "CLVmain32.exe". 

You can use this method to link CLV-Setup to several different configurations on your 

Windows desktop. 

In this way, for example, you can prevent CLV-Setup from attempting to establish a 

connection when a CLV is not connected. 

10.6.11 The CLV Assistant 

The CLV assistant is not suitable for parameterizing the CLV 490. 




Appendix 

10.7 Configuring a CLV with command strings 

The CLV can be parameterized and operated with command strings via the terminal interface 

or the host interface. Parameters which are unknown to the CLV-Setup may be used 

providing that the command string convention is followed. This allows, among other things, 

the setting of special devices as well as the configuration of new CLV parameters (which are 

unknown to "CLV-Setup" program) if your version of the CLV is older in comparison. The 

"CLV-Setup" user interface is based on the command language. 

The command language accesses the CLV’s command interpreter directly. Use this language 

with care. Commands sent to the CLV are carried out immediately. 

Parameter values changed by commands are at first only activated in the current parameter 

set in the CLV’s RAM. The altered parameter values must be saved to non-volatile memory 

in the EEPROM (after the changes are made) using a special command. If the values are not 

saved, they will be lost when the voltage supply is cut off. 

The "CLV-Setup" Terminal Emulator’s online mode makes it possible to parameterize the 

CLV with command strings directly. Fig. 10-38 shows a view of the Terminal Emulator with 

command lines and PC/CLV communication output windows. 

! 

" 

Fig. 10-38: CLV-Setup: entering commands in the Terminal Emulator 

1. Click on in the symbol bar. 

The Terminal Emulator window opens. The CLV is in Reading mode. 

2. Under DEVICE MODE, click on the PARAMETERIZING option field. 

The CLV aborts reading mode. The "Device Ready" LED extinguishes. 

CLV-Setup switches the CLV into the parameterize mode with a command. 

All commands in parameterize mode begin with "3". 

3. Enter the desired command in command line 1, and press the key. 

The command is sent to the CLV. 

The CLV answers with an echo if the command was syntactically correct (in most cases). 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



Note 

Example: 

The command "3LT" causes the CLV to display the parameter values of the reading 

trigger in coded form in output window 2. 

4. To return to Reading mode, click on the READING MODE option field. 

The "Device Ready" LED lights up. 

The parameter values directly changed with command strings in the CLV are registered and 

shown only after the parameter set is uploaded from the CLV. 

A list of command strings, is available on request. 




Appendix 

10.8 Calculating parameter values for setting the CLV 

10.8.1 Calculating the number of scans (for standard decoders) 

The maximum number of scans possible for a bar code depends on the conveyor velocity v. 

Line scanner: ladder-type bar code arrangement 

Line scanner: lateral reading at object 

I s 

v 

= 

s 

-- 

t 

Calculation for 

standard decoder! 

v 

= 

l s 

t scan 

1 

------------------------ ; t 

n× 

scan 

= --- 

f 

v 

= 

l 

--- s 

× f 

n 

v 

n 

= 

l s 

v ---- 

× f 

Specified values: 

Number of scans n = 

Convoyer velocity v = 1.5 m/s 

Bar length l S = 20 mm 

Scanning frequency f = 600 Hz 

Bar code 100 % readable 

n 

0.02 m 

= ---------------------- × 600/s n = 8 

1.5 m/s 

Fig. 10-39: Line scanner: calculating the number of scans for ladder-type bar code arrangements 

Line scanner: fence-type bar code arrangements 

Line scanner: lateral reading on object 

I c 

v 

= 

s 

-- 

t 



v 

= 

( – ) 1 

------------------------ ; t 

n 

scan 

= --- 

f 

l LH 

l c 

× t scan 

I LH 

v 



Convoyer velocity v = 2 m/s 

Code length with blanc zone l C = 150 mm 

Reading field height l LH = 400 mm 


Bar code 100 % readable, 

all scans on the code 

Code window s = l LH – l C 

v = 

n = 

n = 

( l LH 

– l c 

) 

----------------------- × f 

n 

( l LH 

– l c 

) 

----------------------- × f 

v 

( 0.4 – 1.5) m 

-------------------------------------- × 600/ s 

2 m/s 

n = 75 

Fig. 10-40: Line scanner: calculating the number of scans for fence-type bar code arrangements 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



Line scanner with oscillating mirror: fence-type bar code arrangement 

Line scanner with oscillating mirror: side read on object 

I LM 

I CW 



I c 

10° 



Conveyer velocity v = 0.5 m/s 

Code length with blanc zone l C = 100 mm 

Code length under 10°: 

100 mm 

l CW 

= ---------------------------- = 102 mm 

cos 10 

Reading field height l LH = 500 mm 


Bar code 100 % readable, all scans on the code 

Code windows = l LH - l C 

1. Dwell time of the bar code 

in the reading area: 

2. Required oscillating mirror 

frequency: 

t 

= 

s 

-- 

v 

1 

f SW 

= --- 

t 

t = 

t = 

( l LH 

– l CW 

) 

----------------------------- 

v 

( 0.5 – 0.102) 

--------------------------------------- 

0.5 m/s 

t = 796 ms 

1 

f SW 

= ---------------------- 

0.796 s 

f SW = 1.26 Hz 

3. Number of possible scans 

(rough estimate): 

n 

= 

f 

--------- 

f SW 

n 

= 

600 Hz 

---------------------- 

1.26 Hz 

n = 476 

Fig. 10-41: Line scanner with oscillating mirror: calculating the number of scans for fence-type bar 

code positioning 




Appendix 

10.8.2 Calculating the start position and mirror speed for the forward and return 

phase of the One-Shot function 


Theoretical calculation: reading from the front (object moving towards CLV) 

v 

h o 

A 

d 

B 

(Scanning direction is vertical to drawing plane) 

x 1 

x 2 

d 

h s 

Legend: 


Standard decoder! 

h 0 = Max. object height 

h S = Distance of the CLV across conveyor level 

ϕ = Oscillating angle 

α = Max. angle of impact on bar code (skew) 

Start Phase 1: Point A 

Start Phase 2: Point B 


h S > h 0 

α ≤ 45° (better: α ≤ 30°) 

Set max. deflection angle: ±20° 

¾ Determine distances through measurement: 

x 1 = Distance at Start Phase 1 

x 2 = Distance at Start Phase 2 

1. Focus position for distance configuration: 

h s 

sin α= ---- ⇒ d = 

d 

2. Oscillating angle ϕ 

γ = 90°– α 

cos( ϕ + γ) 

= 

( h s 

– h 0 

) 

------------------------- 

d 

( ) 

h s 

– h 0 

ϕ= 

arc cos⎛--------------------------⎞ – γ 

⎝ d ⎠ 

h 

------------ s 

sinα 

¾ Enter ϕ symmetrically to CW = 50: 

StartPos 1 50 CW ϕ 2 --- 1 CW 

= + × --------------- 

⎝ 

⎛ 0.5 ⎠ 

⎞ 

3. Mirror speed ϕ *) : 

v 

ϕ* 

⇒ 

= 

∆x 

------ ; ∆x = x 

∆t 

1 

– x 2 

= 

∆x 

------ 

v 

∆ϕ 

------- 

∆t 

During the period ∆t, in which the object moves from x 1 to x 2 

the oscillating mirror must also pass through the angle ∆ ϕ 

= ------ 

∆ϕ 

ϕ* = ∆ϕ 

ϕ* 

v 

× ------ where 1 °/s = 2 CW/s 

∆x 

When entering the values, note the following: 

– Debouncing time of the Sensor 2 switching input 

(One-Shot trigger) 

– Start time of the oscillating mirror 

(inertia) 

StartPos 2 50 CW ϕ 2 --- 1 CW 

= – × --------------- 

⎝ 

⎛ 0.5 ⎠ 

⎞ 

¾ 

¾ 

Select the mirror speed of the return phase, in accordance 

with the distances between the objects, so that the scan 

line returns to the starting position (Point A) at the right 

time. 

Check the theoretically calculated values on site and adapt 

them if required. 

Fig. 10-42: One-Shot: Line scanner with oscillating mirror: calculating the number of scans for fence-type bar code positioning 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



10.8.3 Calculating the necessary bar code distance if several bar codes are read on 

each object 

dx 

A B C D E A B C D E 

dx 

dy 

A B C D E A B C D E 

SMART Decoder: 

for bar codes with identical code type and identical or different data contents. 

Distance dx: 

Distance dy: 

min. 60 x module width 

e. g. 30 mm for module width 0.5 mm 

7 x d scan 

where d scan = vertical distance between two consecutive scan lines 

e. g. scan line 90 to bar code, scanning frequency 800 Hz, v = 2 m/s 

V 

2000 mm/s 

dscan = ---- dscan = -------------------- = 2.5 

f 800 /s 

dy = 7 x 2.5 mm = 17.5 mm 

Standard Decoder: 

The above distances are also required for reading bar codes with identical names (identical 

data content and code types). 

Prerequisite for separating bar codes with identical names: 

1. The CODE DISTANCE between the bar codes must be parameterized correctly 

(DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab, EDIT TRACKING PARAMETERS button) 

2. The code position comparison must be activated 

(CODE CONFIGURATION tab, under CODE POSITION) 

Bar code lines in conveyor direction: 

If the scan line is to detect bar codes of the same name with the same code position, the travel 

information must be supplied by an external incremental sensor or the internal INC timer so 

that the bar codes can be distinguished from one another. 

Rule of thumb: the blank zone should surround the bar code completely! 

Fig. 10-43: Required distance between the bar codes on an object 




Appendix 

10.9 Tables 

10.9.1 Calculating the code length of a bar code 

The code length of a bar code is the number of useful characters in the printed code 

including the check digit (if present). This code length must be specified in CLV-Setup. 

If the code type of a bar code is known, the code length can be calculated by counting the 

bars and gaps. The relevant formulas are provided in Table 10-8. 

1. Count the bars and gaps as specified in Table 10-8. 

Do not forget to include the start and stop characters. 

2. Calculate the code length using the formula in the table. 

3. Enter the value in CLV-Setup as described in column 4 in the table. 

Code type Count Calculation of code length 1)2) Entry in CLV-Setup 

Code 39 Number of bars Number – 10 

Calculated code length 

I Code = ————————— 

5 

2/5 Interleaved Number of wide elements 

(bars and gaps) 

Number – 1 

I Code = ————————— 

2 

EAN Not applicable 13 characters (normal version) 

8 characters (short version) 

UPC Not applicable 12 characters (UPC A, normal version) 

6 characters (UPC E, short version) 

Codabar Number of bars Number – 8 

I Code = ————————— 

4 

Code 128 

(character set A) 

Code 93 

Number of bars Number – 10 

I Code = ————————— 

3 

Number of bars plus 

separator after the 

stop character 

Number – 13 

I Code = ————————— 

3 

EAN 128 Number of bars Number – 10 

I Code = ————————— 

3 

1) Check digit optional for Code 39, 2/5 Interleaved, Codabar. 

Check digit always integrated in printed bar code with EAN, UPC, Code 128, Code 93, EAN 128 

(suppressed automatically when the CLV read result is output) 

2) With only few exceptions each printed character that has to be decoded corresponds to an ASCII character. 

With Code 39 extended, Code 93, Code 128 and EAN 128, the number of characters in the data string of the CLV 

can be larger than the number of characters in the printed code because it comprises several character sets. 

Table 10-8: Formulas for calculating the code length of a bar code 


Activate 13-digit 

Activate 8-digit 

Activate Version A 

Activate version E 






Chapter 10 

Appendix 



10.10 Discussion of a parameterization example 

10.10.1 Application Conditions 

• Reading with the CLV 490’s autofocus function 

• Reading the packages from above 

• Barcode with lines running vertically on the top side of the package, tilt across from the 

scan line: ±30° 

• Package height: 100 ... 600 mm, package width: 200 ... 550 mm, packages not guided 

• Conveyer velocity: v = 1 m/s, conveyer belt width: 600 mm 

• Object distance between packages: min. 300 mm 

• Barcode: 2/5 Interleaved, module width 0.4 mm, line length 15 mm, PR 2.5:1, 

Quality 3 or 4, 14 characters with test code (mod 10) 

• Do not read under plastic sheeting, do not use very dark packages 

(spectral reflection > 20 %) 

• 1 barcode per package 

• Reading pulse is through a SICK photoelectric switch 

• Output of read results via the host interface 

• Parameterization of the CLV based on the factory defaults 

Requirements: 

• Testing the application for feasability with the CLV 490 before buying, with the help of 

the SMART calculation sheet (service provided by SICK) 

• Choice of CLV type: here standard density line scanner (CLV 490-0010) 

• No objects irrelevant for reading portruding into conveyor path 

Tools: 

• Measuring tape (up to 3 000 mm) 

• Protractor (to set up the CLV) 

• A PC with Windows and the SICK software "CLV-Setup" 

• RS-232 interface (pin 2 and pin 3 crossed), e. g. no. 2 014 054 

• These operating instructions 

10.10.2 Purpose of this discussion 

• To make important clarifications 

• To indicate the fitting location of the CLV 

• To point out the parameters to be set in the CLV-Setup user interface 

10.10.3 Instructions for solution – step by step 

¾ 

¾ 

¾ 

¾ 

¾ 

Determine the reading range and CLV’s installation height over the conveyor belt 

Determine the CLV’s distance measurement type 

Mount the CLV 

Parameterize the CLV 

Test an application 




Appendix 

10.10.4 Important clarifications 

¾ Sketch out the reading situation and enter the parameter values and variables for the CLV. 

y coord. 

a) View from the front 

b) Side view 

Y2 Y1 

alpha = 270° beta = 10° 

Z2 

z coord. 

1400 

700 

10 

x coord. 

100 

Z1 

LS 

200 

100 

300 

550 

600 


Fig. 10-44: Parameterization example: prepare a sketch of the reading situation 

¾ 

¾ 

Determine the reading range and installation height of the CLV above the conveyor belt: 

With a covered conveyor belt with a 600 mm width, the CLV can read an object at a distance 

of 600 mm (according to the reading field diagram in Fig. 10-1, Page 10-3). For 

a reserve of an additional 100 mm and a maximum package height of 600 mm, the resulting 

reading range of the CLV can be set to 700 ... 1 300 mm from the reading window. 

The CLV is to be mounted 1 400 mm above the conveyor belt, as the package must be 

at least 100 mm high. 

Determine the CLV’s distance measurement type: 

For the required total field depth range of 600 mm, a height detection of the focal position 

changeover is required. This is carried out by activating the CLV’s direct distance 

measurement (the basis of the autofocus function). 

10.10.5 Mounting and electrical connection 

1. Mount the CLV centered 1 400 mm above the conveyor belt (vertically) according to 

a) Fig. 10-44 , reading window facing downward. 

2. Align and screw in the CLV in a reading axis with the reading window at a 10° angle 

against the required reading direction as shown in b) Fig. 10-44 

The CLV can carry out a distance measurement from the front of the package to the 

top of the package while it is in motion. 

3. Attach the pulse photoelectric switch and reflector to the conveyor belt so that there is 

a distance of approx. 100 mm between the photoelectric switch and the scan line 

position on the package with the smallest height. 

4. Connect the CLV to the AMV/S 60 connection module. 

(see Chapter 5.2.3 Connections/cables for the AMV/S Connection Module, Page 5-3) 

5. Connect the pulse photoelectric switch to the AMV/S 60 connection module 

(see Chapter 5.5.7 Connecting the switching inputs, Page 5-16). 

6. Turn on the supply voltage to the CLV. 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



10.10.6 Parameterize the CLV with the "CLV-Setup" program 

1. Connect the PC to the CLV’s terminal interface (see Chapter 5.5.5 Connecting the CAN 

interface, Page 5-15) 

2. Start Windows and the "CLV-Setup" program on the PC. 

3. Invoke the CLV 490’s default setting in the "CLV-Setup" program 

(see Chapter 6.1 Overview of steps for starting up the CLV, Page 6-1). 

4. Parameterize the CLV with the help of Chapter 6.4.4 Guide to parameterization menu, 

Page 6-8 and the tab cards by following the steps described. 

5. After completing parameter value alterations, download them to the CLV! 

(see chapter Chapter 6.4.1 Configuring the CLV via the user interface of CLV-Setup, 

Page 6-5). 

1. Setting up the autofocus function (Part 1): READING CONFIGURATION tab 

¾ Set the following parameters: 

– Scanning frequency: 800 Hz 

– Start/stop ratio: auto 

– Trigger for focus position changeover: autofocus 

– Autofocus mode: differential background 

Fig. 10-45: Parameterization example: settings on the "Reading Configuration" tab 

¾ 

Click on the EDIT AUTOFOCUS button. 

The EDIT AUTOFOCUS dialog window then opens. 

¾ Set the following parameters on the ADJUSTMENTS tab (Fig. 10-46, Page 10-59): 

– Preference of focus distance: Fix focus position: 1200 mm 

(approx. 100 mm above the packet with the smallest height) 




Appendix 

Fig. 10-46: Parameterization example: "Edit Auto Focus/Adjustments" dialog window 

¾ 

To set the background, switch to the LIMIT VALUES tab in the same dialog window (Fig. 

10-47). The background is formed using the autofocus area’s terminating planes. The 

CLV registers the altered reading distances in this area only. 

– Autofocus limitation: min: 600 mm; max: 1400 mm 

– Autofocus space: Right edge of conveyor (Y1): 50 mm 

(Limiting levels Left edge of conveyor (Y2): 550 mm 

from feed level) Level of conveyor (Z1): 50 mm 

Maximum scanning height (Z2): 800 mm 

Fig. 10-47: Parameterization example: "Edit Auto Focus/Limits" dialog window 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



¾ Set the following parameters on the OPTIMIZATION tab (Fig. 10-48) 


Timeout: 50 ms 

Hysteresis: 50 mm 

– Distance Measurement: active 

– Source of Distance information: internal 

– Smooth filter active: active Length: 3 

Fig. 10-48: Parameterization example: "Edit Auto Focus/Optimizations" dialog window 

¾ 

Confirm the dialog window by clicking "OK". 

2. Setting up the autofocus function (Part 2): DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab 

Fig. 10-49: Parameterization example: Buttons on the "Device Configuration" tab 




Appendix 

¾ 

Click on the EDIT SCANNER POSITION tab. 

The EDIT SCANNER POSITION dialog window then opens. 

Set the following CLV position definition parameters regarding the movement level (see also 

Fig. 10-44, Page 10-57): 

¾ Set the following parameters on the ANGLES tab: 

–Angle alpha: 90 degrees (Laser beam’s direction of deflection relative to the direction 

of convoyer belt. 

– Angle beta: 10 degrees (Laser beam’s angle of incidence relative to the perpendicular 

in the area (Skew to the barcode), 10 degrees in the direction of feed) 

– Angle gamma: 0 degrees (Divergence of the scanner (reading windows) from the 

perpendicular in the plane askew to the direction of feed) 

Fig. 10-50: Parameterization example: "Edit Scanner Position/Angles" dialog window 

¾ Set the following parameters on the COORDINATES tab, see Fig. 10-51, Page 10-62 

– X coordinate: Measure the distance from the pulse photoelectric switch to the 

CLV’s reading window perpendicular! 

(x offset + x coordinate = the distance from the pulse photoelectric switch to the 

CLV’s reading window perpendicular) 

–Y coordinate: 300 mm (The middle of the CLV to the left edge of the conveyor belt 

in the direction of convoyer belt) 

– Z coordinate: 1400 mm (Height of the CLV above the conveyor belt) 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



Fig. 10-51: Parameterization example: "Edit Scanner Position/Coordinates" dialog window 

¾ 

Confirm the dialog box with "OK". 

3. Set the reading pulse source: DEVICE CONFIGURATION tab 

¾ 

¾ 

In the READING TRIGGER MODE group click the option Sensor Input (Active High). 

In the Output on Good read group click the option End of label. 

Fig. 10-52: Parameterization example: Settings on the "Device Configuration" tab 

¾ 

Confirm the dialog box with "OK". 




Appendix 

4. Set the evaluation properties: CODE CONFIGURATION tab 

¾ 

Set the following parameters: 

- Codes: 2/5 Interleaved; deactivate all other code types! (remove check) 

- Number of Codes: Minimum 1, Maximum 1 

- Code Positions: deactivate (remove check) 

- Decoder: SMART/Standard 

Fig. 10-53: Parameterization example: settings on the "Code Configuration" tab 

¾ 

¾ 

Click on the EDIT CODES button. 

Set the following parameters on the 2/5 INTERLEAVED tab in the dialog window: 

- Code Length: Fixed; length 1: 14 characters 

- Multiple Reads for Length 1: 3 

- Check Digit Test for Length 1: mod 10 

- Transmit Check Digit: activate 

- Transmit Leading Zero: activate 

Fig. 10-54: Parameterization example: "2/5 Interleaved" tab 

¾ 

Confirm dialog box with ”OK”. 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



5. Set the output properties: HOST INTERFACE tab 

¾ Set the CLV’s end-user communication condition parameters 

Fig. 10-55: Parameterization example: "Host interface" tab (base setting) 

DATA STRINGS tab 

¾ Set the CLV output message format in the end-user communication conditions 

Fig. 10-56: Parameterization example: "Data Strings" tab (basic setting) 

¾ 

Perform download to CLV. 

10.10.7 Testing the application 

¾ 

Check the reading rate with the Terminal Emulator in the CLV-Setup while an application 

is running. 

The reading rate should be > 90%. 




Appendix 

10.11 Special applications and procedures 

10.11.1 Auxiliary input 

If the CLV cannot read a bar code in Reading mode (e. g. if there is no bar code on the object), 

the data content of the bar code can be sent subsequently to the host by using the 

"Auxiliary input" function. In this way, the sequence of reading results can be completed if 

necessary. 

The auxiliary input function uses the terminal interface of the CLV exclusively and features 

two options: 

• Manual entry of the data content on the keyboard of a connected terminal or PC 

(Terminal Emulation function) 

• Entry of the bar code using a hand-held reader. The data is then forwarded to the CLV 

via an internal or external decoder. 

Fig. 10-57 shows the basic auxiliary input principle. 

CLV 

Data contents + 

Status ST=7 

HOST 

Data 

contents 

Fig. 10-57: Auxiliary input via the terminal interface of the CLV 

The CLV sends the data content of the bar code that it receives via the terminal interface to 

the host in the same format as the other reading results on the host interface. Each string 

can contain the data from a bar code with a maximum length of 50 characters. The CLV automatically 

enters the status ST = 7 if the error status has been enabled for transmission. 

The values of the other reading diagnosis data in the data string do not have any significance. 

To enable the CLV to receive the data content of the bar code on the terminal interface, you 

must switch the operating mode on the interface to auxiliary input . 

1. Connect the PC to the terminal interface on the CLV using an RS 232 data connection 

cable (AMV/S 60: connect the PC to the internal 9-pin "Service" plug). 


2. Start CLV-Setup on your PC. 

See Chapter 10.6.3 Starting CLV-Setup, Page 10-43. 

3. Choose the AUXILIARY INTERFACE tab. 

4. Choose the AUXILIARY INPUT option from the drop-down list. 

5. Download the changes to the CLV by clicking in the toolbar . 



The terminal interface then operates temporarily in "Auxiliary input" mode. 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



Entering the bar code using the Terminal Emulator function in CLV-Setup 

1. Click on the toolbar. 

The Terminal Emulator is launched. 

The CLV is in Reading mode. 

2. Click the EXTENDED radio button in the TERMINAL MODE section. 

The start and stop characters used by the Terminal Emulator are displayed at the top 

of the screen, on the left and right of the text input field. 

Fig. 10-58 shows the Terminal Emulator window in extended mode. 

3. Use the drop-down lists to set the start and stop characters to NUL. 

4. Enter the data content of the bar code (character string) on the keyboard. 

Use the backspace key to correct any input errors. 

The data content must not contain control characters. 

5. Press the [RETURN] or [ENTER] key. 

The CLV then interprets all further characters as a new data string. 

CLV-Setup sends the character string to the CLV and deletes the entry in the text field. 

The CLV does not send an echo. 

6. Once the active reading pulse has ended, the CLV sends the data received from the PC 

to the host via the host interface. 

Fig. 10-58: CLV-Setup: auxiliary input on the Terminal Emulator 




Appendix 

Entering a bar code using a terminal/PC keyboard 

1. Connect the terminal /PC with Terminal Emulation program to the terminal interface on 

the CLV (via AMV/S 60). For the pin assignment, see Chapter 5.5.5 Connecting the CAN 

interface, Page 5-15. 

2. Set the communication parameters and data output format as shown in Table 10-9. 

Parameter 

Value 

Data transmission rate 9 600 bit/s 

Data bits 8 

ParityNone 

Stop bits 1 

Data output format Data terminator 

e. g. 1234 CR 

Table 10-9: Communication parameters on the terminal/PC for the auxiliary input 

3. Enter the data content of the bar code on the keyboard. 

The terminal sends the individual characters to the CLV immediately. 

Use the backspace key to correct input errors. 

4. Terminate the data content with the control character . 

The CLV then interprets all further characters as a new data string and ignores other 

control characters. The data content itself must not contain any control characters. 

5. Once the active reading pulse has ended, the CLV sends the data received from the PC 


Entering bar codes using a handheld scanner with decoder 

1. Connect the handheld scanner with decoder to the terminal interface of the CLV (via 

AMV/S 60). For the pin assignment, see Chapter 5.5.5 Connecting the CAN interface, 

Page 5-15. 

2. Set the data format and communication parameters on the handheld scanner as shown 

in Table 10-9. 

3. Read the bar code with the handheld scanner. 

Once the active reading pulse has ended, the CLV sends the data received from the PC 


If you are using the ST 1100 decoder from SICK, for example, set the communication parameters 

and data output as shown in Table 10-10. 

Parameter 

Value 

Terminal ID 

Unassigned 

WA Network 

No 

ACK/NAK 

No 

Baud rate 

9 600 bit/s 

Data bits 7 

ParitySpace 

Configuration RS 232 

Preamble (Header) Clear 

Postamble (Terminator) CR 

Table 10-10: Communication parameter settings for the ST 1100 decoder 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



10.11.2 Daisy-chain configuration 

(data forwarding or master/slave arrangement) 

See Technical Information "Master/Slave with Bar Code Scanners from the CLV Series" 

(no. 8 007 675). 

10.11.3 SICK network (RS 485) 

See Technical Description "CLX 200 Network Controller" 

(no. 8 007 157, German/English edition). 

10.11.4 Connection to Profibus DP 

See Operating Instructions "BMV/BMH 10 for Profibus DP" (no. 8 008 825). 

10.11.5 Connection to the DeviceNet 

See Operating Instructions "BMV/BMH 10 for DeviceNet" (no. 8 008 972). 

10.11.6 Connection to Interbus-S 

See Technical Information "BMS 10/20 for Interbus-S" (no. 8 007 546). 

10.11.7 Connection to Ethernet 

See Operating Instructions "BMV/BMH 10 for Ethernet" (no. 8 009 398). 

10.11.8 Building a CAN scanner network 

See Operating Instructions "Application of the CAN interface" (no. 8 009 180). 

10.11.9 Integration in an OPS reading system 

See Operating Instructions "Omni Tracking System OTS 400" (no. 8 008 869). 




Appendix 

10.12 Replacing a CLV (copying the parameter set) 

There are two methods of replacing a CLV and transferring the current parameter set to the 

new device: 

• By downloading the parameters from CLV-Setup 

• By importing the parameter set from the external memory 

The parameter set can only be transferred between identical device types. 

10.12.1 Downloading the parameter set 

To download the parameter set, you must connect a PC running the "CLV-Setup" software 

to the replacement device. The parameter set of the CLV that is to be replaced must be 

available as a configuration file in CLV-Setup, otherwise the device must be parameterized 

from scratch. 

1. Disconnect the power supply to the AMV/S 60 Connection Module (of the CLV). 

2. Disconnect all cable connectors from the CLV. 

3. Remove the CLV from the bracket. 

Before doing so, mark the position and alignment on the bracket/station. 

4. Mount, align, and connect the replacement device. 

5. Connect the PC to the terminal interface on the CLV using an RS 232 data connection 

cable (AMV/S 60: connect the PC to the internal, 9-pin "Service" plug). 



Once the CLV has started, the "Device Ready" LED lights up. 

7. Switch on your PC and start Windows. 

8. Start CLV-Setup. 

If the communication parameters on the PC and CLV are identical, CLV-Setup uploads 

the parameter set from the CLV and displays the values on the tabs. 

9. Open the archived parameter set as a configuration file "*.scl" in CLV-Setup and download 

it to the CLV. 


11. Check whether the CLV reads the bar codes correctly. 

Correct the parameter settings if necessary. 

12. Finally, download the tested parameter set to the CLV and save it with the PERMANENT 

storage option. 

The parameter set is transferred permanently to the replacement device. 

13. Save the modified parameter set as a new configuration file in CLV-Setup. 


If the software version on the replacement device is older than the version on the old device 

(e. g. new device is from warehouse stock), the parameter set transferred may contain coded 

parameters or parameter values that cannot be interpreted by the older software. The 

new device, however, outputs an error message in CLV-Setup for each of these parameters/values 

when the parameter set is downloaded. 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



¾ 

Check whether all of the parameter settings used are necessary to configure the CLV 

for the current reading application. If necessary, replace the software version in the new 

device. 

If the software version on the new device is more recent than that on the old one, the default 

settings in the imported parameter set will include parameters that were not contained in 

the old version. 

¾ 

Upload the parameter set and check whether the new parameters are relevant for configuring 

the CLV for the current reading application. If necessary, change the parameter 

values and download the parameter set to the CLV again. Save the new parameter set 

as a configuration file in CLV-Setup. 

See also Chapter 10.6.8 Unknown parameters, Page 10-47. 

10.12.2 Importing the parameter set from the external memory 

A PC does not have to be connected to import the parameter set from the external memory. 

The parameter set in the external memory must contain an up-to-date copy of the set used 

by the CLV that is to be replaced. Otherwise, the replacement device will import a different 

parameter set to its RAM when it is started. The start option in the device must be set to 

START WITH EXTERNAL PARAMETERS. This is the default setting. 

1. Switch off the power supply to the AMV/S 60 Connection Module (of the CLV). 

2. Remove the connector cover (containing the parameter memory) from the CLV. 

3. Remove the CLV from the bracket. 

Mark the position and alignment of the CLV on the bracket station. 

4. Mount the connector cover on the terminals correctly and screw it into place. 

5. Mount and align the replacement device. 


The CLV starts and loads the parameter set from the external memory to the RAM. 

The "Device Ready" LED blinks for approx. 10 s and then lights up constantly. 

The parameter set is transferred temporarily to the replacement device. It is lost when the 

device is switched off but is loaded again from the external memory the next time the CLV 

starts. 

See also Chapter 10.3.8 Replacing a CLV, Page 10-37. 


If the software version on the replacement device is older than that of the parameter set in 

the external memory (e. g. if the replacement device originated from the warehouse), the 

loaded parameter set may contain parameters or parameter values that cannot be interpreted 

by the older software. In this case, the "Device Ready" and "Read Result" LEDs blink 

together for approx. 10 s, after which the "Device Ready" LED lights up constantly. See also 

Chapter 10.6.8 Unknown parameters, Page 10-47. 

If the software on the replacement device is newer than that of the parameter set in the 

external memory, the parameter set loaded from the external parameter memory to the 

replacement device will contain new parameters that are set to the default values. 




Appendix 

10.13 Accessories 

10.13.1 Mounting accessories 

Order No. Description Figure 

2 016 110 Quick clamping device, complete with securing material Fig. 10-61 

2 013 824 Angle bracket, single, with 2 screws M 6 x 10 mm, self-locking Fig. 10-59 

2 018 435 Articulated bracket (two angle brackets 2 013 824), with 2 screws M 6 x 10 mm, self-locking Fig. 10-60 

Table 10-11: Accessories: mounting accessories 

Order No. Type Description 

10.13.2 Connection modules 

1 017 134 AMV 60-011 Connection Module for one CLV 490 without heater, with 1 x 15-pin D Sub HD device socket/plug, 

terminal strips (signal distributor) for connecting the data and function interfaces, internal 9-pin D 

Sub "Service" plug, strain-relief clamps, polycarbonate housing, enclosure rating IP 30 (max. IP 54), 

operating voltage 18 ... 30 V DC 

1 017 139 AMS 60-013 As AMV 60-011, with integrated power pack: 230 V AC 50 Hz/24V DC 

1 017 140 AMS 60-012 As AMV 60-011, with integrated power pack: 115 V AC 50/60 Hz/24V DC 

1 017 387 AMS 60-023 As AMS 60-013, with 2-row LCD 

1 017 391 AMV 30-071 Connection Module with two CLV 490 without heater, with 2 x 15-pin D Sub HD device socket/plug, 

terminal strips (signal distributor) for connecting the data and function interfaces, two 9-pin D Sub 

"Service" plugs, strain-relief clamps, polycarbonate housing, enclosure rating IP 30 (max. IP 54), 


1 019 592 AMV 71-081 Connection module for CLV 490 without heater, with 1 x 15-pin D Sub HD device socket/plug, 

spring terminal strips (signal distributors) for connecting the data and function interfaces, internal 9- 

pin D-Sub "Service" plug, plastic cable glands, polycarbonate housing, enclosure rating max. IP 30. 

With address function for network operation, operating voltage 10 ... 30 V DC 

6 021 105 AMV 100-011 Universal Connection Module for one CLV 490 with/without heater, with 1 x 15-pin D Sub HD 

device socket/plug, terminal strips (signal distributor) for connecting the data and function interfaces, 

internal 9-pin D Sub "Service" plug, strain-relief clamps, cast aluminum housing, enclosure 

rating IP 54 (max. IP 65 with connector cover), operating voltage 18 ... 30 V DC 

6 021 106 AMV 200-011 As AMV 100, but for two CLV 490s with/without heater 

6 007 655 – Power cable, 3-wire, length 2 m, with 3-pin connector (grounding) and one open end (stripped) 

Table 10-12: Accessories: connection modules 


10.13.3 Bus connection modules 

6 020 896 BMV 10-0111 Bus Connection Module for connecting one CLV 490 with/without heater to a Profibus DP, with 1 x 

15-pin D Sub HD device socket/plug. With 9-pin D Sub bus socket, terminal strips (signal distributor) 

for connecting the RS 232 and function interfaces, internal 9-pin D Sub "Service" plug, strainrelief 

clamps, cast aluminum housing, enclosure rating IP 54 (max. IP 65 with connector cover), 


6 020 893 BMH 10-0111 Bus module for connection of one CLV 490 to Profibus DP; with terminal screws, a 9-pin D-sub bus 

socket, no housing, for top-hat-rail installation, enclosure rating max. IP 20, operating voltage 

10 to 30 V DC 

6 021 190 BMV 10-0311 Bus connection module for connection of one CLV 490 to DeviceNet, terminal strips for bus 

connection, otherwise, as BMV 10-0111 

Table 10-13: Accessories: bus connection modules 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 




6 021 188 BMH 10-0111 Bus module for connection of one CLV 490 to DeviceNet, otherwise as BMH 10-0111 

1 012 683 BMS 20-0113 Bus Connection Module for connection of one CLV 490 without heater to an Interbus-S, with 1 x 

15-pin D Sub HD device socket/plug, two 9-pin D Sub bus connections (in/out), terminal strips (signal 

distributor) for connecting the data and function interfaces, internal 9-pin D Sub "Service" plug, 

integrated power pack 230 V AC 50 Hz/ 24 V DC, strain-relief clamps, enclosure rating IP 30 (max. 

IP 54) 

1 012 684 BMS 20-0112 As BMS 20-0113, with integrated power pack 115 V AC 50/60 Hz/ 24 V DC 

6 025 757 BMV 10-0411 Bus connection module for the connection of one CLV 490 with/without heater to Ethernet. 

TCP/IP communication, data transmission rate 10 MBit/s. 

For the CLV 490 with 1x 15-pin D Sub HD device socket/plug. With a 8-pin RJ-45 bus socket, terminal 

strips (signal distributors) for wiring the RS 232 data interface and the functional interfaces, 

internal 9-pin D Sub "Service" plug, cable grips, die-cast aluminum housing, enclosure rating max. 

IP 54 (enclosure rating max. IP 65 with connector cover), operating voltage 20 to 30 V DC 

6 025 756 BMH 10-0411 Bus module for connection of one CLV 490 to Ethernet. 

TCP/IP communication, data transmission rate 10 MBit/s. 

With terminal screws, a 8-pin RJ-45 bus socket, no housing, for top-hat-rail installation, enclosure 

rating max. IP 20, operating voltage 10 to 30 V DC 

6 022 140 BMV 10-0431 as BMV 10-0411, but with FTP communication, data transmission rate 10/100 MBit/s 

6 025 748 BMH 10-0431 as BMH 10-0411, but with FTP communication, data transmission rate 10/100 MBit/s 

6 007 655 – Power cable, 3-wire, length 2 m, with 3-pin connector (grounding) and one open end (stripped) 

Table 10-13: Accessories: bus connection modules 




Appendix 

10.13.4 Cables, external parameter memories and plug cover 

a) CLV without heater 

Temperature range of connection material: 

Stationary: –30 ... +70 °C; moving: 0 ... +70 °C 

Order No. Description Wires Length Connection 

2 020 302 Connection cable for data interfaces ("Host/Term") or function interfaces 

("I/O"), ∅ 8 mm, shielded, with 15-pin D Sub HD socket and 

15-pin D Sub HD plug. 

Required: 2 per CLV 

2 020 303 Connection cable for data interfaces ("Host/Term"), ∅ 8 mm, shielded, with 

15-pin D Sub HD socket and one open end (stripped). 


2 020 264 Connection cable for function interfaces and power supply ( "I/O"), 

∅ 8 mm, shielded, with 15-pin D Sub HD plug and one open end (stripped). 


2 020 307 Connector cover with parameter memory (EEPROM), 

enclosure rating IP 65, with two connection cables,each ∅ 8 mm, shielded, 

with 15-pin D Sub HD socket and 15-pin D Sub HD plug. 



enclosure rating IP 65, with two connection cables, each ∅ 8 mm, shielded, 

two open ends (stripped). 



enclosure rating IP 65, with two connection cables ∅ 8 mm each, shielded, 

with 9-pin D Sub HD plug and one open end (stripped). 


2 014 054 RS 232 data cable, ∅ 5 mm, shielded, with two 9-pin D Sub sockets 

(Pin2 (RxD) and Pin 3 (TxD) crossed) 

6 010 088 Data cable, ∅ 6.6 mm, shielded, for connection cables up to 3 m 15 x 0.09 

mm 2 

15 3 m CLV 490 to 

AMV/S 60 

AMV 30-071 

BMV 10/BMS 20 

15 3 m CLV 490 to Host 

15 3 m CLV 490 to sensors 

PLC and non-SICK 

Power pack 

each 15 x 

0.14 mm 2 3 m CLV 490 to 

AMV/S 60 

AMV 30-071 

BMV 10 

each 15 x 

0.14 mm 2 3 m CLV 490 to host, 

sensors, PLC and 

non-SICK Power 

pack 

each 10 x 3 mm CLV 490 to 

0.2 mm 2 BMS 20 

3 3 m PC to AMV/S 

BMV 10/BMS 20 

Meter 

ware 

6 007 508 Data cable, ∅ 8.5 mm, twisted pair, shielded 2 x 2 x Meter 

0.23 mm 2 ware 

Table 10-14: Accessories: cables and connector covers for the CLV without heater 

Free wiring 

SICK network 

(RS 485) 

Note 

Other cable lengths/types for CLV without heater available on request. 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



b) CLV with heater 

Temperature range of connection material: 

Stationary: –50 ... +70 °C; moving: –40 ... +70 °C 

Order No. Description Wires Length Connection 

2 021 689 Connector cover with with parameter memory (EEPROM), 

enclosure rating IP 65, with 2 connection cables, each ∅ 8 mm, 

shielded, with 15-pin D Sub HD socket and 15-pin D Sub HD plug 


2 021 298 2 x connector cover, enclosure rating IP 65, 

with 2 connection cables, each ∅ 6.7 mm, shielded. 


2 021 267 Connector cover, enclosure rating IP 65, 

with 2 connection cables, each ∅ 6.7 mm, shielded, 

two open ends (stripped). 


each 15 x 3 m CLV 490 to 

0.14 mm 2 AMV 100/200 

each 13 x 3 m CLV 490 to 

2x 0.75mm 2 

0.14 mm 2 + 

AMV 100/200 

1 x 18 x 

0.14 mm 2 + 

1 x 2 x 0.75 mm 2 3 m CLV 490 to 

Host, sensors, 

PLC and non- 

Sick Power pack 

Table 10-15: Accessories: cables and connector covers for the CLV with heater 

Note 

Other cable lengths/types for CLVs with heater available on request. 

10.13.5 Plug-in connections 

Order No. Description 

6 009 438 D Sub connector housing (metal) for 9-pin or 15-pin HD inserts 

6 007 335 D Sub connector insert, 9-pin socket connector 

6 010 019 D Sub connector insert, 15-pin HD socket connector 

6 010 020 D Sub connector insert, 15-pin HD pin connector 

Table 10-16: Accessories: plug-in connections 

10.13.6 Reading pulse generators 

The SICK catalog "SENSICK Sensors for Automation" (no. 8 006 530) contains a large selection 

of photoelectric switches and photoelectric proximity switches as well as the associated 

accessories (brackets, connection cables) 


10.13.7 Network controller 

On request CLX 200 Network controller with LCD, touch-sensitive keypad, integrated power pack and 9-pin D-Sub 

connections for network, host and terminal, enclosure rating IP 31 

Table 10-17: Accessories: network controller 




Appendix 

10.14 Dimensioned drawings of the accessories 

10.14.1 Angle bracket, single no. 2 013 824 

30 

6.5 

7.5 

45 

15 

30 

25 

45 

50 

Enclosed to securing the CLV: 

2 x cylinder head screws M 6 x 10 mm, 

self-locking 

6.5 

ø 6.5 

97.5 

6.5 

30 

7 

ø 6.5 

15 

30 

56 

Fig. 10-59: Dimensions of the angle bracket, single No. 2 013 824 

10.14.2 Articulated bracket No. 2 018 435 

68 

Enclosed to securing 

the CLV: 

2 x cylinder head screws 

M 6 x 10 mm, 

self-locking 

Fig. 10-60: Dimensions of the articulated bracket No. 2 018 435 

10.14.3 Quick clamping device No. 2 016 110 

No. 2 016 110 

Enclosed parts: 

– 2 x hexagon socket head screws 

M 6 x 16 mm 

– 2 x flat-head screws M 6 x 12 mm 

– 2 x washer A 6.4 

– 1 x threaded pin M 8 x 16 mm 

No. 2 013 824 

Fig. 10-61: Front view of quick clamping device No. 2 016 110 with angle braket No. 2 0130824 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



10.15 Supplementary documentation 

Order No. Title Contents 

2 021 445 Technical Documentation Set – CLV 490 Operating Instructions in German and English 

– 1 CD-ROM with the CLV-Setup/CLV-Setup Help/I-ViewPro TM browser 

software 

8 008 296 "AMV/S 60" 


8 008 648 "AMV 30-071" 


Description for connecting the CLV without heater to the host/PLC/sensor 

via the AMV/S 60 Connection Module 

Description for installing two CLVs without heaters to the host/PLC/sensor 

via the AMV 30-071 connection module 

8 009 154 Operating Instructions "AMV 70/71" Description for wiring the CLV to the SICK-Netzwerk/PLC/sensor via the 

AMV/S 71 connection module 

8 008 879 "AMV 100/200" 


8 007 675 "Master/Slave with CLV Bar Code Scanners" 

Technical Information 

8 007 157 "CLX 200 Network Controller" 

Technical Description 

8 008 825 "BMV/BMH 10 for Profibus DP" 


8 008 972 "BMV/BMH 10 for DeviceNet" 


8 007 546 "BMS 10/20 for Interbus-S" 

Technical Information 

8 009 398 "BMV/BMH 10 for Ethernet" 

operating instructions 

8 008 869 "Omni Tracking System OTS 400" 


8 009 180 "Application of the CAN Interface" 


Description for connecting 1 (2) CLV without/with heater to the host/PLC/ 

sensor via the AMV 100 (AMV 200) Connection Module 

Description of building a daisy-chain configuration 

(master/slave or data forwarding) 

Description of building a SICK Network (RS 485) with 

CLV bar code scanners 

Description for connecting the CLV to the Profibus/PLC/sensor 

via the BMV/BMH 10 Bus Connection Module 

Description for connecting the CLV to the DeviceNet/PLC/sensor via the 

BMV/BMH 10 bus connection module 

Description for connecting the CLV to the Interbus/SPS/sensor via the 

BMS 20 Bus Connection Module 

Description of the connection of the CLV to the Ethernet/the PLC/the 

sensor via the bus connection module BMV/bus module BMH 10 

Description of the integration of the CLV 490 in an omnidirectional OPS 

reading system 

Description for building a CAN network (electrical connection, configuration 

of the CLV, functions) 

On request Command strings Description of the command strings for the CLV functions 

Table 10-18: Supplementary documentation in English language 




Appendix 

10.16 Glossary 

For further terms, please refer to the "CLV-Setup Help". 


Special operating mode that enables the center of the scan line to be positioned exactly on 

the object containing the bar code. 

Aperture angle α 

Angle within whose limits the laser beam is deflected by the polygon mirror wheel. A 

V-shaped range perpendicular to the scan direction, which must contain the bar code, is formed 

in front of the reading window. If only part of this aperture angle is used (part of the 

scan line symmetric around the center point), the depth of field for the focus position and 

resolution is greater. 

Aspect ratio 

Ratio code height (bar length) to code length (numer of characters) Using the SMART Decoder 

even bar codes with very small code height can be read. 

Autofocus function 

Ability of the CLV to detect the distance of the objects during the reading operation without 

external sensors in order to adapt the focus position to the reading plane of the bar codes. 

Auxiliary input 

Special function on Ö the terminal interface. Used to enter bar code data subsequently in 

order to complete reading results sent to the host. 

Capture range 

Zone around a moving bar code created by the CLV using the increment management and 

code position comparison functions. Enables bar codes with identical contents and code 

type to be separated. 

Christmas tree effect 

Effect caused by limiting the active scan line range (CP values) and oscillating amplitude 

(CW values) on the Ö line scanner with oscillating mirror. In this way, a uniform sharply 

defined window can be created in the reading field for each distance configuration, 

independent of the reading distance. 

CLV-Setup 

PC program that runs on Windows 95 TM /98 TM and Windows NT TM and is used to parameterize 

the CLV offline (adjust the device to the local conditions) and operate it online. The 

parameter set is exchanged with the CLV by Ö uploading and Ö downloading it. 

CLV-Setup Help 

Online help function that provides support for using the "CLV-Setup" program. The help 

function explains the CLV parameters and their permissible values and can be launched 

directly from CLV-Setup in an HTML browser, such as Netscape Navigator TM , or I-ViewPro TM 

supplied with the program. 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



Code angle (CW value) 

Current deflection range of he scan line (oscillating mirror) perpendicular to the scan 

direction when a bar code is recorded. Calculated by the CLV for each scan and used, for 

example, to define a capture range so that bar codes with identical data contents in a given 

range can be separated. 

Code geometry 

Length and height dimensions of the bar code. 

Code position (CP value) 

Position of the first dark bar in a detected bar code along the Ö scan line. Calculated by the 

CLV for each scan and can be used, for example, to separate bar codes with identical data 

contents. The active evaluation range in the scan line can be restricted for Ö decoding 

purposes by specifying the maximum and minimum CP value for the application. 

Command strings, commands 

CLV user interface – alternative to the "CLV-Setup" program. Basic, yet clearly structured 

command language for modifying the CLV parameter sets online. Accesses the CLV 

command interpreter directly. Special programming activities are required to use the 

command strings from the host. 

Configuration file 

File in the "CLV-Setup" program that archives the entire Ö parameter set of the CLV. Can 

also be printed out in tabular form. 

Data forwarding 

Option of forwarding data sent by the host transparently to a terminal via the CLV using an 

identifier. Data can also be forwarded in the opposite direction. Furthermore, this function 

also allows data received on one of the serial interfaces to be output again straight away on 

one of the same interfaces (echo). Application: forwarding reading results in pass-through 

mode, e. g. in a master/slave network. 

Data output string 

Structured data telegram in the Ö reading result output by the CLV on the Ö host interface. 

The structure of the data string is flexible and can be adapted to a large extent to the subsequent 

data processing task. The data output format of the Ö terminal interface, on the 

other hand, cannot be changed. 

Decoder, decoding 

Code-type-specific evaluation routine for reconstructing the read bar code in electronic form 

in order to decode its data content. 

Deflection angle 

Angle about each side of the center position CW = 50 (equal to 0 ) that the Ö scan line 

sweeps when it is deflected by the oscillating mirror. Also referred to as the oscillating angle. 


Deflection of the scan line caused by the Ö oscillating mirror, perpendicular to the scan 

direction about the center position CW = 50 at each side (corresponds to a deflection angle 

of 105 ). Also referred to as oscillating amplitude. The maximum deflection range is set in 




Appendix 

OSCILLATING WITH FIXED AMPLITUDE mode. In OSCILLATING WITH VARIABLE AMPLITUDE mode, the 

deflection range is set for each distance configuration using the OSCILLATING MIRROR tab in 

the "CLV-Setup" program. 

Distance configuration 

Data record in the CLV for defining a Ö focus position for the laser beam for Ö dynamic 

focus control. The focus position as well as the maximum and minimum Ö code position 

must be entered on the READING CONFIGURATION tab in the "CLV-Setup" program for this purpose. 

In the case of the line scanner with oscillating mirror, the Ö oscillating amplitude 

(deflection range) is also required. The depths of field for the individual focus positions are 

shown as a function of the resolution values in the specification diagrams. 

Distance detector 

System for recording the distance of objects with a bar code in front of the CLV in stages. 

When the bar code is read from above, for example, the distance is detected by installing 

photoelectric reflex switches above one another beside the conveyor belt. Together with the 

combination of "IN 0" to "IN 4" switching inputs and the assignment table for the Ö distance 

configurations, the ranges for Ö dynamic focus control are defined. Only required if the 

Ö Autofocus function is not used. 

Distance profile 

When using the Ö Autofocus function with differential background (with or without tracking), 

the CLV can teach-in the ambient background (without objects) to narrow its active reading 

range. The CLV creates a profile of the various distances in its reading field along the scan 

lines in a special mode. This profile is then used to detect objects in the reading field and to 

set the required focus position at the level of the bar code on the object. 

Download 

Method of transferring the Ö parameter set that was modified with the Ö "CLV-Setup" program 

offline from the PC to the RAM of the CLV. CLV-Setup transfers either a complete copy 

of the CLV (DOWNLOAD TO CLV) to the memory (RAM) or just the edited parameters using the 

right mouse button’s context menus (DOWNLOAD PARAMETER). You can overwrite the existing 

parameter set in EEPROM of the CLV by choosing the PERMANENT storage option. 

Dynamic focus control 

Function for shifting the focal point of the laser beam across a wide range in the reading plane. 

The dynamic focus control function is event controlled (e. g. by the distance detector) or 

dynamic in the Ö Autofocus function. 

Error messages 

Messages in Ö plain text that are used to identify a malfunction on the CLV in Reading mode. 

The messages are output on the terminal interface only. Exception: ST = 3 (device error), 

which is also output on the host interface. The error messages can be displayed in 

extended mode under TERMINAL EMULATOR in the "CLV-Setup" program. 

Error status 

Identifier output with the reading result by the CLV for errors that were diagnosed while the 

bar code was being read. The entry for the host interface is made in the separator of the 

Ö data output string and must be enabled using the parameters (enabled by default). 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



Focus position 

Distance of the focal point of the emitted laser beam in front of the reading window. Can be 

varied using the optical components in the CLV. Creates a distance-specific depth of field 

(DOF) in which he bar code can be detected. 

Functional interfaces 

Switching inputs and outputs on the CLV. 

Good Read 

The CLV successfully detected a bar code or the required number of bar codes specified by 

the evaluation parameters during the Ö reading pulse. 

Header 

Data block in the reading result on the Ö host interface. Used as a header in the Ö data 

output string for the subsequent data content of the bar code. Contains reading diagnosis 

data and/or constants (e. g. letters), depending on the configuration (empty by default). 


Main data interface on the CLV with configurable data output format. Used to output the 

Ö reading result in telegram form to the host/PLC. Integrates the CLV in the SICK network 

or builds a master/slave arrangement. Physically switchable to RS 232 or RS 422/485. It 

supports various transmission protocols. 

Increment management 

Used in certain applications to separate bar codes with identical contents that move during 

the reading procedure and assign them to the objects. 

Line scanner 

Scanner that uses a polygon mirror wheel with paraxial mirrors to deflect a focused laser 

beam extremely fast. As a result, it creates a light spot in the reading plane that moves along 

a straight line, which appears to the naked eye as a stationary scan line. 


Line scanner that also deflects the laser beam about a central position, on both sides and 

perpendicular to the scan direction using an oscillating mirror. By doing so, the CLV can search 

for bar codes in larger areas. In addition to basic deflection with the maximum oscillating 

amplitude, optimum oscillating mirror functions are also possible (variable deflection per 

distance configuration, Ö One-Shot). 

Master/slave configuration 

Special arrangement for connecting up to max. 10 SICK bar code scanners in the CAN scanner 

network to one reading station (e. g. left/right read). Thanks to the master, the entire network 

appears as one device to the host. 

Multiple read 

Variable number of reading operations that must provide identical reading results (data 

content) of the same bar code before the CLV outputs the result. 




Appendix 

No Read 

The CLV failed to detect a bar code or the required number of bar codes specified by the 

evaluation parameters during the Ö reading pulse. 

No Read format 

Special, parameterizable data block as a substitute for bar codes, which were expected but 

not detected, in the data output string on the host interface for Ö No Read. Comprises a 

variable combination of the error string and the Ö separator. 

Object height detector 

See distance detector. 

One-Shot 

Selective, one-off deflection of the oscillating mirror for each Ö reading pulse. Usually comprises 

a slow forward phase (read) and a fast return phase (return to starting position). 

Oscillating mirror reversal point 

Deflection point of the oscillating mirror at which it changes direction. Can be used to trigger 

a Ö focus position switchover for slower applications (search mode). 

Parameter set 

Data record used to initialize and activate the functions implemented in the CLV. With 

Ö downloading and Ö uploading the parameter set is transferred form CLV-Setup to the 

CLV or from the CLV to CLV-Setup. 

Parameter memory, external 

Optional accessory containing an integrated connector cover. Enables devices to be conveniently 

replaced by storing a copy of the CLV parameter set (EEPROM). The replacement 

device then accesses this parameter set directly and does not have to be configured 

manually. 

Percentage evaluation 

Special operating mode in which the quality of the reads (not those of the bar codes, however) 

is assessed statistically. The bar codes must be stationary. The CLV carries out 100 

scans and evaluates the reading quality. It then outputs the reading results on the Ö terminal 

interface every 2 s together with the Ö reading diagnosis data. 

Plain text 

Legible form of a CLV message. The CLV outputs special messages in coded form, e. g. the 

result of the self-test is represented as three digits. 

Reading diagnosis data 

Data directly derived from the reading procedure by the CLV. This data enables the quality 

of the read to be assessed. The data is always output on the Ö terminal interface together 

with the reading result. Only output on the host interface if enabled on the DATA STRING tab 

in the "CLV-Setup" program. The error status ST is output in the separator by default. 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 




Length of the Ö scan line that is available for detecting the bar code in the reading plane. 

Due to the V-principle of beam generation, the reading field height is dependent on the 

reading distance. 

Reading interval 

Timeslot in which the CLV activates the laser diode and attempts to detect valid bar codes 

from the information read. The reading interval may be shorter than the external reading pulse, 

depending on the selected output mode for the reading result. 

Reading pulse 

Clock pulse applied externally to the CLV to trigger the internal Ö reading interval. Can be 

supplied by a photoelectric reflex switch or a command from the host on the serial interface. 

Reading range (DOF) 

Depth of field about the focal point of the laser beam on two sides. The extent of the reading 

range depends on the resolution and reading distance. 

Reading result 

Electronic representation of the data content of the read bar code together with the Ö reading 

diagnosis data in one Ö data output string that is generated after the reading pulse has 

elapsed. The reading result on the terminal interface has a fixed format (content and output 

format); the reading result on the host interface can be configured separately for Good 

Reads and No Reads. Special characters can also be added if necessary. 

Result status output 

Function of the four "Result 1" ... "Result 4" switching outputs in Reading mode. Signals the 

status of the reading result without indicating its contents (e. g. Good Read). You can assign 

a status to each output on the DEVICE FUNCTION tab in CLV. The "Read Result" LED is linked 

to the "Result 2" output. 

Scan line 

See line scanner. 

Sending point 

Point at which the reading result is output with respect to the start of the Ö reading pulse 

and the internal Ö reading interval. 

Separator 

Data block in the reading result on the Ö host interface. Used to separate the data content 

of the bar codes. Can be attached to the bar code as a prefix or suffix. Contains reading 

diagnosis data and/or constants (e. g. letters), depending on the configuration. The error 

status ST is output in the seperator by default. 

SICK network 

Special, high performance network of max. 31 CLVs with high data transfer rates on the 

RS 485 interface. The CLVs are coordinated (polling) and connected to the host via the CLX 

200 Network Controller. 




Appendix 

SMART decoder 

Specially developed Ö decoder for reading bar codes with an extremely small code height 

and for poor-quality or contaminated code prints. 

Specification diagrams 

Diagrams for reading the resolution-specific depth of field (DOF) for specific focus positions. 

Standard decoder 

Tried-and-tested Ö decoder from the CLV product family. Suitable for applications with an 

adequate code height, limited tilt, and high-quality code prints. 

Storage in the CLV 

The application-specific Ö parameter set can be stored temporarily or permanently in the 

CLV. If it is stored temporarily in the RAM, it is lost as soon as the power supply is switched 

off. Parameter sets that are stored permanently are transferred to the EEPROM in the CLV 

and remain active as the current data record when the power supply is switched off. The 

default setting is not affected by this and is stored in a read-only memory (ROM). 

Switching sequence 

Focus control function for event-controlled switching. Sequence of focus position settings 

with associated depths of field. The numbers of the active Ö distance configurations are entered 

at the required position in the assignment table for this purpose. 

System messages 

Messages Ö in plain text used to output the operating status of the CLV. The messages 

are output on the terminal interface only and can be displayed in extended mode in the TER- 

MINAL EMULATOR of the "CLV-Setup" program. 

Teach-in 

Method of programming the information required to adjust the CLV to the reading application 

in Parameterization mode. Example: teaching in the background for the Autofocus 

function, also known as a Ö distance profile. 


Auxiliary data interface (RS 232) on the CLV with fixed data output format. Used to connect 

the "CLV-Setup" program to the CLV so that it can operate and configure the device. Also 

used to output system and error messages. Can be assigned various functions. 

Terminator 

Data block in the reading result on the Ö host interface. Used to terminate the data content 

of the bar code. Contains reading diagnosis data and/or constants (e. g. letters), depending 

on the configuration. The control characters and are output in the terminator by 

default. 

Upload 

Method of transferring the Ö parameter set from the CLV to the PC using the Ö "CLV-Setup" 

program. CLV-Setup loads either a complete copy of the current parameter set from the 

CLV’s memory (RAM)(UPLOAD TO CLV) or just the recently edited parameter, using the right 

mouse button’s context menus (UPLOAD PARAMETER). Displays the current parameter values 

on the tabs. Prerequisite for modifying the current parameter set. 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



User interface 

Windows-based PC software "CLV-Setup" for operating and configuring the CLV. 




Appendix 

10.17 Copy of the EC Declaration of Conformity 

Fig. 10-62: Reproduction of the declaration of conformity (Page 1, reduced in size) 


Chapter 10 

Appendix 



Fig. 10-63: Reproduction of the declaration of conformity (Page 2, reduced in size) 




Appendix 

10.18 Index 

A 

Abbreviations.................................................................................I-10 

Accessories 

- Dimensioned drawings...................................................10-75 

- Order specifications ........................................................10-71 


- Function .....................................................................................4-9 

- Starting the mode ...............................................................6-24 

Adjusting the CLV 

- Reading angles........................................................................4-5 

- Steps...........................................................................................4-8 

AMV/S 60 Connection Module 

- Block diagram..........................................................................5-3 

- Cables.........................................................................................5-3 

- Function .....................................................................................5-3 

- Mounting.................................................................................4-10 

Aperture angle 

- Definition....................................................................................4-4 

- Max. value.................................................................................4-4 

Autofocus 

- Function .....................................................................................3-6 

- Operating mode......................................................................3-6 

- Parameterization.....................................................................6-9 

Auxiliary input 

- Function ...............................................................................10-65 

- Starting the mode ............................................................10-65 

Azimuth angle (Tilt) 

- Definition....................................................................................4-5 

- Limit values...............................................................................4-5 

B 

Background teach-in 

- Function .....................................................................................3-6 


Bar code 

- Calculation the unknown bar code length ..............10-55 

- Sample (scannable) ........................................................10-91 

C 

Cables 

- Overview ....................................................................................5-2 

- Wire colors................................................................................5-9 

CAN network 

- Building a CAN network..................................................10-68 

- Interfaces ..................................................................................5-6 

- Tab...............................................................................................6-8 

Cleaning the CLV...........................................................................7-1 

CLV-Setup 

- Default settings.................................................................10-43 

- Download ..................................................................................6-6 

- Functions .............................................................................10-46 

- Intallation on the PC ........................................................10-41 

- Log file for serial communication ...............................10-48 

- Starting .................................................................................10-43 

- Tabs.............................................................................................6-6 

- Unknown parameters .....................................................10-47 

- Upload ........................................................................................6-5 

- User interface ....................................................................10-45 

Code angle CW 

- Count direction ....................................................................... 4-6 

- Output in the data string (host interface) ..................... 4-7 

- Parameterization.................................................................... 6-9 

Code position CP 

- Count direction within the scanline................................. 4-6 

- Output in the data string (host interface) ..................... 4-7 

- Parameterization.................................................................... 6-9 

Command strings 

- Function............................................................................... 10-48 

- Input into terminal emulator ........................................ 10-49 

Configuation (parameterization).............................................. 6-5 

Connecting the PC..................................................................... 5-15 

Connection diagram .................................................................... 5-3 

Connection modules 

- Order specification .......................................................... 10-71 

- Overview.................................................................................... 5-1 

Connector cover 

- Electrical connecting............................................................. 5-5 

- Function..................................................................................... 3-8 

- Pin assignment ....................................................................... 5-7 

- Wire colors ............................................................................ 5-12 

Control elements .......................................................................... 3-8 

D 

Declaration of conformity.................................................... 10-85 

Decoder 

- SMART decoder ..................................................................... 3-5 

- Standard decoder ................................................................. 3-5 

Default settings 

- CLV-Setup........................................................................... 10-43 

- Extract of CLV.......................................................................... 6-2 

- Printing the settings of CLV................................................ 6-1 

Depth of field (DOF) 

- Adjusting the radial pattern................................................ 3-6 

- Diagrams................................................................................ 10-1 

Device functions (interactively) 

- Start ......................................................................................... 6-32 

Device number GN ...................................................................... 5-8 

DeviceNet.................................................................................. 10-68 

Dimensioned drawings............................................................... 9-3 

Dismantling 

- Disposal..................................................................................... 7-2 

- Steps ....................................................................................... 4-13 

Display.............................................................................................. 3-8 

Disposal of the CLV ..................................................................... 7-2 

Distance configuration 

- Function..................................................................................... 3-7 

- Parameterization................................................................. 6-11 

Distance profile (background) 

- Function..................................................................................... 3-6 

- Learning.................................................................................. 6-25 

Documentation additional ................................................... 10-76 

Download 

- Function..................................................................................... 6-5 

- Start Download....................................................................... 6-6 

E 

Electrical installation .................................................................... 5-1 


Chapter 10 

Anhang 



EMC ................................................................................................... 9-2 

Enclosure rating ............................................................................ 9-2 

Error messages 

- Display in the Terminal Emulator ..................................... 8-2 

- Function..................................................................................... 3-5 

- List (CLV with external parameter memory)................ 8-7 

- List (CLV without external parameter memory) ......... 8-2 

Error status in the reading result............................................ 8-9 

Ethernet...................................................................................... 10-68 

Evaluation 

- Decoder types ........................................................................ 3-5 


F 

Figures ............................................................................................. I-12 

Focus position switching 


- Trigger modes......................................................................... 3-7 

G 

Glossary..................................................................................... 10-77 

Good Read................................................................................... 6-21 

H 

Header........................................................................................... 6-30 

Heating 

- Behavior .............................................................................. 10-38 

- Design.................................................................................. 10-38 

- Electrical connection....................................................... 10-39 

- Funktion............................................................................... 10-38 

- Power consumption........................................................ 10-39 

- Switching on delay........................................................... 10-38 

- System requirements........................................................... 3-2 

- Temperatur range............................................................ 10-38 


- Connecting ............................................................................ 5-14 

- Data output string............................................................... 6-30 

- Default setting...................................................................... 5-14 

- Function..................................................................................... 3-5 

- Max. cable lengths ................................................................ 5-8 

- Monitoring in the Terminal Emulator ........................... 6-29 


- Select hardware.................................................................. 5-15 

I 

Identical bar codes 

- Function of CP, CW values ................................................. 4-6 

- Parameterizise the evaluation ....................................... 6-17 

- Separation................................................................................ 4-6 

IN 0 ... IN 4 switching inputs 

- Assignment table ................................................................ 5-18 

- Caracteristic data................................................................ 5-18 

- Connection ............................................................................ 5-17 

- Function..................................................................................... 3-5 


Installation 

- Overview...................................................................................... I-4 

Intended use of CLV.................................................................... 2-1 

Interbus-S.................................................................................. 10-68 

Interfaces of CLV 

- Functions................................................................................... 3-5 

- Overview ....................................................................................5-2 

- Pin assignment........................................................................5-6 

L 

Laser radiation 

- Laser power .............................................................................2-2 

- Laser warning lables, content............................................2-2 

- Protection class ......................................................................2-2 

- Protective circuits, internal..................................................2-3 

- Replacing the laser warning labels..................................4-2 

- User instructions.....................................................................2-2 

- Wave length..............................................................................2-2 

LEDs 

- Function (CLV with ext. param. memory) ...................3-10 

- Function (CLV without ext. param. memory)................3-9 

- Parameterization Result 1 (LED "Read Result")......6-17 

Line...............................................................................................10-14 

Line scanner 

- Dimensional drawing.............................................................9-3 

- Function .....................................................................................3-7 

- Quick start.................................................................................6-3 

- Technical data .........................................................................9-1 

M 

Maintenance...................................................................................7-2 

Master/slave.............................................................................10-68 

Messages (terminal interface)..............................................6-33 

Method of operation 

- Block diagram..........................................................................3-5 

- Description................................................................................3-5 

Monitoring host interface 

- Function ..................................................................................6-29 


Mounting 

- Accessories..............................................................................4-1 

- Mounting the CLV...................................................................4-3 

- Mounting the distance sensors.....................................4-12 

- Preparations.............................................................................4-1 

- Reading pulse sensor........................................................4-10 

Mounting bracket 

- Dimensioned drawings...................................................10-75 

- Function .....................................................................................4-3 

N 

No Read.........................................................................................6-21 

O 

One-Shot (oscillating mirror) 

- Calculating parameter values for the CLV ..............10-53 

- Function ..................................................................................6-14 

Online help.................................................................................10-46 

Operating data 

- Display.....................................................................................6-28 

- Reset........................................................................................6-28 

Operating modes 

- Adjusting mode ....................................................................6-24 

- Overview of modes.............................................................6-19 

- Percentage evaluation ......................................................6-22 

- Reading mode ......................................................................6-19 

- Show CP-limits......................................................................6-26 

Oscillating mirror 




Appendix 

- Deflection range, high density.....................................10-26 

- Deflection range, low denstiy.......................................10-33 

- Deflection range, standard density...........................10-15 

- Design.........................................................................................3-4 

- Dimensioned drawings.........................................................9-4 

- Function .....................................................................................3-7 

- Function in adjusting mode .............................................6-24 

- Function in background Teach-in ..................................6-25 

- Function in reading mode ................................................6-19 

- Function in show CP-limits ...............................................6-27 

- Function in the percentage evalutation ......................6-22 

- Operating modes.................................................................6-12 

- Parameterization..................................................................6-12 

- Quick Start ................................................................................6-3 

- Reversal points .......................................................................3-7 

- Technical data .........................................................................9-2 

- Troubleshooting ...................................................................8-15 

P 

Parameter memory, external 

- Design...................................................................................10-34 

- Electrical connection.......................................................10-35 

- Error messages.......................................................................8-7 

- Function ...............................................................................10-34 

- LEDs ............................................................................................3-9 

- Mounting..............................................................................10-35 

- Operating.............................................................................10-35 

- Pin assignment........................................................................5-7 

- Replacing the CLV............................................................10-37 

- Saving parameters after download.................................6-6 

- Startup first time...............................................................10-36 

- Troubleshooting ......................................................................8-5 

- Wire colors.............................................................................5-10 

Parameter set 

- Download ..................................................................................6-6 

- Function .....................................................................................6-5 

- Upload ........................................................................................6-5 

Parameterization .....................................................................10-56 

- Calculating parameter values......................................10-51 

- CLV-Setup .................................................................................6-5 

- Command strings.............................................................10-49 

- Function .....................................................................................6-5 

- Guide...........................................................................................6-8 

- Replacing a CLV................................................................10-69 

Percentage evaluation 

- Function ..................................................................................6-22 

- Function of "Read Result" LED .........................................3-9 

- Read result output ..............................................................6-23 

- Start the mode.....................................................................6-22 

Pin assignment of CLV ................................................................5-6 

Pitch 

- Definition....................................................................................4-5 

- Limit values...............................................................................4-5 

Power consumption .....................................................................2-4 

Power-up delay 

- Function .....................................................................................5-8 

- Parametrization .......................................................................5-8 

Profibus.......................................................................................10-68 

Protection class............................................................................. 9-2 

Q 

Quick start ....................................................................................... 6-3 

R 

Reading diagnosis 

- Function.................................................................................. 6-28 

- Starting the mode............................................................... 6-29 


- Definition ................................................................................... 4-4 

- Detection (external sensors)............................................. 3-7 

- Distance profile (background) .......................................... 3-6 

Reading field diagrams............................................................ 10-1 


- High density, line scanner............................................. 10-16 

- High density, line scanner with osc. mirror............. 10-21 

- Low density, line scanner ............................................. 10-27 

- Low density, line scanner with osc. mirror ............. 10-31 

- Standard density, line scanner ...................................... 10-3 

- Standard density, line scanner with osc. mirror...... 10-9 

Reading mode 

- Function.................................................................................. 6-19 

- Output of the reading result............................................ 6-19 

- Troubleshooting................................................................... 8-11 

Reading pulse sensor 

- Electrical connecting.......................................................... 5-16 

- Mounting ................................................................................ 4-10 

- Parametrization for trigger source................................ 4-11 

Reading result 

- Host interface....................................................................... 6-29 

- Terminal interface............................................................... 6-20 


Reading trigger 

- Function..................................................................................... 3-5 


- Trigger modes......................................................................... 3-5 

- Triggering via Terminal Emulator................................... 6-20 



- Cleaning..................................................................................... 7-1 

- Position ...................................................................................... 3-4 

Repair............................................................................................. 8-15 

Replacing a CLV 

- Via CLV-Setup ................................................................... 10-69 

- Via the external parameter memory........................ 10-70 

Result 1 ... Result 4 switching outputs 


- Connecting ............................................................................ 5-19 

- Function..................................................................................... 3-5 


S 

Scanning frequency 

- High density, line scanner............................................. 10-20 

- High density, line scanner with osc. mirror............. 10-25 

- Low density, line scanner ............................................. 10-30 

- Low density, line scanner with osc. mirror ............. 10-32 

- Standard density, line scanner ...................................... 10-8 

- Standard density, line scanner with osc. mirror... 10-14 


Chapter 10 

Anhang 



Scope of supply............................................................................ 3-1 

Self-test 

- Error messages...................................................................... 8-2 

- Function.................................................................................. 6-31 


Sensor for distance detection 

- Electrical Connection......................................................... 5-17 

- Function.................................................................................. 4-12 

- Mounting ................................................................................ 4-12 

- Parametrize for trigger source....................................... 4-12 

Sensor switching input 


- Connecting ............................................................................ 5-16 

- Function..................................................................................... 3-5 


Separator...................................................................................... 6-30 

Show CP-limits 

- Function.................................................................................. 6-26 


SICK network............................................................................ 10-68 

SICK Support............................................................................... 8-15 

Skew 

- Definition ................................................................................... 4-5 

- Limit values .............................................................................. 4-5 

SMART decoder............................................................................ 3-5 

Software versions........................................................................... I-2 

Specification diagrams ............................................................ 10-1 

Start-up............................................................................................. 6-3 

Supply voltage ............................................................................... 5-8 

- Connecting ............................................................................ 5-13 

Surface reflection 

- Avoiding reflection ................................................................. 4-5 

Switching off the CLV ............................................................... 6-34 

System messages 

- Display in the terminal emulator ................................... 6-33 

- Function..................................................................................... 3-5 

- List of messages.............................................................. 10-40 

System requirements 

- Connection Modules ............................................................ 3-2 

- Sensors ..................................................................................... 3-2 

- Supply voltage......................................................................... 3-2 

T 

Tables .............................................................................................. I-10 

Technical data................................................................................ 9-1 

Terminal emulator ..................................................................... 6-20 


- Connecting ............................................................................ 5-15 

- Data format........................................................................... 6-20 

- Default setting...................................................................... 5-16 

- Function..................................................................................... 3-5 

- Max. cable length................................................................... 4-2 

- Operating mode .................................................................. 6-28 

Terminator.................................................................................... 6-30 

Thread Blind hole 

- Dimensions .............................................................................. 4-3 

- Position ...................................................................................... 3-4 


- Analysis and remedy..........................................................8-10 

- Error messages.......................................................................8-2 

- Error status in the reading result......................................8-9 

U 

Upload 

- Function .....................................................................................6-5 

- Starting upload........................................................................6-5 

V 

Variants of CLV...............................................................................3-1 

W 

Warning messages 

- Display in the Terminal Emulator...................................6-33 

- Function .....................................................................................3-5 

- List of messages .................................................................6-33 




Appendix 

10.19 Bar code example 

! " # 

Codabar 

2/5 Interleaved 

9876543210 

Code 39 

C L V 4 9 0 

A 1 2 3 4 A 

Module width 

0.35 mm 

Module width 

0.5 mm 

Module width 

1.0 mm 

Fig. 10-64: Scannable bar codes with various module widths (print ratio 2:1) 


Australia 

Phone +61 3 9497 4100 

(0 08) 33 48 02–toll free 

Fax +61 3 9497 1187 

Austria 

Phone +43 22 36/62 28 8-0 

Fax +43 22 36/62 28 85 

Belgium/Luxembourg 

Phone +32 24 66 55 66 

Fax +32 24 63 31 04 

Brazil 

Phone +55 11 5561 2683 

Fax +55 11 5535 4153 

China 

Phone +85 2 2763 6966 

Fax +85 2 2763 6311 

Czech Republic 

Phone +42 02-579 11 850 

+42 02-578 10 561 

Fax +42 02-578 10 559 

Denmark 

Phone +45 45 82 64 00 

Fax +45 45 82 64 01 

Finland 

Phone +358 9-728 85 00 

Fax +358 9-72 88 50 55 

Japan 

Phone +81 3 3358 1341 

Fax +81 3 3358 0586 

Korea 

Phone +82 2 786 6321/4 

Fax +82 2 786 6325 

Netherlands 

Phone +31 30 229 25 44 

Fax +31 30 229 39 94 

Norway 

Phone +47 67 56 7500 

Fax +47 67 56 6100 

Poland 

Phone +48 22 837 40 50 

Fax +48 22 837 43 88 

Singapore 

Phone +65 67 44 37 32 

Fax +65 68 41 77 47 

Spain 

Phone +34 93 4 80 31 00 

Fax +34 93 4 73 44 69 

Sweden 

Phone +46 8-680 64 50 

Fax +46 8-710 18 75 

8 008 796/0000/25-06-2002 · 5M/TR · SMD · Printed in Germany · Subject to change without prior notice · AftE3605sw 

France 

Phone +33 1 64 62 35 00 

Fax +33 1 64 62 35 77 

Germany 

Phone (+49 2 11) 53 01-0 

Fax (+49 2 11) 53 01-1 00 

Great Britain 

Phone +44 17 27-83 11 21 

Fax +44 17 27-85 67 67 

Italy 

Phone +39 02-92 14 20 62 

Fax +39 02-92 14 20 67 

Switzerland 

Phone +41 41 61 92 93 9 

Fax +41 41 61 92 92 1 

Taiwan 

Phone +886 2 2365-6292 

Fax +886 2 2368-7397 

USA 

Phone +1(781) 302-2500 

Fax +1(781) 828-3150 

Representatives and agencies in 

all major industrial countries. 

SICK AG · Division Auto Ident · Nimburger Straße 11 · 79276 Reute · Germany · www.sick.de

Reference Manual - clv490.pdf - Machine Vision Components

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?